giao an anh 6

-Do exercises -Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: -Vocabulary & Grammar : Contents of the tests III.teaching aids: -T: text book, plan, work book -Ss: text books, notebook, pens [r]

Preparetion date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 1: Introduction English I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges:-By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to know the aims of subject + Structure of English + How to learn English 2.Skills: Listening 3.Attitude: Ristrick II.Language contents -Review english III.Teaching aids: -T: Book, lesson plan -Ss: Book, notebook IV Procedure: 1.Greeting Check the pre-lesson New lesson T's activities Sts' activities Contents - Introduce the lesson Ask Sts: - Have you ever learnt - Answer English? - Listen & answer - What you know about English? - Listen and take English is the 1st book for the first Sts in secondary Introduce English note school in Viet Nam It consists of 16 units Sts will learn units in the 1st semester and the rest for the second one Each unit includes or sections which related to eachother Each section has basic activities as below: Getting started with pictures which attract Sts Introduce the new content/ knowledge as in Listen and Read/ Listen and repeat Check the understanding as - Let Sts observe the in Ask and answer questions/ English book -Listen & remember Practice with a partner/ Match/ True or false Practice doing exercises in order to practice reading, listening, writing and speaking skills Remember is summarize the lesson Grammar practice has further exercises Consolidation: Repeat main points Homework : -Consolidate words and structures -Prepare Unit -Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 2: Unit 1: GREETINGS Section A: HELLO Lesson 1: A1,2,3&4 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to greet and introduce themselves 2.Skills: Practice skills 3.Attitude: Ristrick II.Language contents Grammar: Hi/ Hello I’m / My name is 2.Vocabulary: hello, hi, I, am, is ,name III Teaching aids: -T: Text book ,plan , pictures -Ss: Book, notebook IV Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson Can you read again the alphabets 3.New lesson: Teacher’s activities I Warm up: Sts’ activities Contents -Ask Ss to look at the picture (p10) and answer the questions: ?What you when you meet others ? -Ask Ss to give some greetings in Viet Namese II Presentation: - Read A1(p10) and ask Ss to repeat * Hi * Hello -Call on Ss practice -Explain : Hi/ Hello (informal greetings) -Give situation:two Ss meet each other in the park +Greet in groups or chain reaction) Eg: S1:Hello,Nam S2: Hi, Minh -Call on some pairs practice before class ? What you say when you introduce yourself? -Let Ss listen to A3 to know how to introduce one’s name -Read A3 -Call on Ss practice A3 -Explain how to introduce oneself I am + Name My name is + name I am = I’m My name is = My name’s Eg: I’m Minh My name is Minh -Practice with groups using structure: I am My name is -Look at and answer -give some greetings in Viet Namese Listen and repeat -Listen and repeat Hi Hello -Read aloud - Listen and write -Imagine and practice in pairs -Practice 2.Practice -name, age, address -Listen S1: Hello! S2: Hi ! S3: Hello 3.Listen and repeat: -Listen and repeat - Read aloud -Listen and write - I(pron) name (n) my (pron) I am = I’m My name is = My name’s Eg: I’m Minh My name is Minh -Work in groups I am + Name My name is + name -Practice III.Practice: Unit 1: Greetings Section A: Hello A1,2,3,4 Introduce oneself Practice: -Give situation: a new student greets and introduces oneself - introduce themselves with an old student in class - Ask Ss to introduce themselves in two ways: I’m/ My name is - Call on Ss practice before class a) I am b) My name is Consolidation -Greetings and introduce oneself 5.Home work: - Do exercise A1-2(p4) in workbook -Prepare A5-8(p12-13) Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 3: Unit 1: GREETINGS Section A: HELLO Lesson 2: A5,6 &7 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges:-By the end of the lesson, students will be able to drill greetings +Ask and answer about healthy + Say thanks 2.Skills: Listening,speaking,writting,reading 3.Attitude: Working hard II.Language contents: 1.Grammar: How are you ? I’m fine, thanks And you? 2.Vocabulary: Mr,Miss, thank,fine, you,ar III Teaching aids: -T: Text book ,lesson plan , pictures -Ss: Book, notebook IV Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Two Ss go to the board to greet and introduce their name -Two Ss go to the board to introduce person in the pictures(ex1in work book) New lesson: Teacher’s activities I.Warm up: Ask ? Sts’ activities Contents Unit 1: Greetings What’s the date today? ?How are you today? ?Who is morniter ? ?Who is absent today? II.Presentation: -Ask Ss to look at the picture A5(p12) to introduce the dialogue: ?Who are they? ?What are they doing? -Read the conversation and guide Ss to read -Explain new word and new tructures: *How are you? ( I’m )fine,thanks And you? (Ask and answer about healthy.You can use for greeting).If you want to ask one’s healthy again you only ask: And you?(rising tune) -Ask Ss to perform the dialogue before class (correct pronunciation) -Ask Ss to make up similar dialogue then practice before class -Listen & answer -look at and listen -Answer the questions -Listen and repeat -listen and write down (using formal) -let Ss make simlar dialogues base on A5 1.New words: - you (pron) -fine (adj) -thank (v) 2.New structures: - -present before class -make similar dialogues and practice III.Practic -Ask ss to look at the picture A6(p12) and tell their names -Explain new words: Miss:cô Mrs: bà(phụ nữ chưa có chồng) Mr:ông, ngài Section A: Hello (A1,2,3,4) -Look at and listen -Listen and write -Listen and prepare How are you? I’m fine,thanks And you? (Ask and answer about healthy.You can use for greeting).If you want to ask one’s healthy again you only ask: And you?(rising tune) 3.Practice: - Miss:cô - Mrs: bà(phụ nữ chưa có chồng) -Mr:ông, ngài => using formal Eg:S1:Hello,Miss Hoa S2:Hello,Mr Hung S1:How are you? S2:I’m fine,thanks And you? S1:Fine,thanks Eg:S1:Hello,Miss Hoa S2:Hello,Mr Hung S1:How are you? S2:I’m fine,thanks And you? S1:Fine,thanks -Ask Ss to the same picture - call on some pairs perform before class.(correct pronunciation) -Ask Ss to look at A7(p13) then write the dialogue betwen Nam and Lan in your exercise book -Call on some Ss to read aloud their reading -Correct mistake -work in pairs -Present before class -Look at and listen then write -read aloud Eg:S1:Hello,Nam S2:Hello,Nga S1:How are you? S2:I’m fine,thanks And you? S1:Fine,thanks -Liten and correct Consolidation : -How are you? -I’m fine,thanks.And you? 5.Homwork: -Learn by heart new words -Do ex 3-4(p5) in work book -Prepare section B1-6 _ Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 4: Unit 1: GREETINGS Section B: GOOD MORNING Lesson 3: B1,2,3 & I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to greet at different time in a day Say goodbye 2.Skills: -Practice skills 3.Attitude : -Work hard -Love subjects II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: morning, afternoon, evening, night, children 2.Grammar: Good morning/ afternoon/ evening, Goodbye III Teaching aids: -T: Text book ,lesson plan , pictures -Ss: Book, notebook IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -2 pairs go to the board and perform ex4(p5) in work book 3.New lesson: Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up: -Ask Ss to retell greetings they -Retell: Hi/Hello have learned -Answer ?When we use them? Unit 1: Greetings -Ask Ss to look at the picturesB1(P14) -Look at the Section B: and guess what time the day is pictures and say Good morning -Using pictures to introduce new B1-6 words -Listen and write II.Presentation: -Read B1and guide Ss read -Listen and repeat -Listen and write -Explain how to use these greetings +Good morning/afternoon/evening: formal than Hi/Hello using to greet some one and must use right time of day +Googbye: Tạm biệt (bye: informal) +Good night: Chúc ngủ ngon -Ask Ss to practice B1 -Practice -Ask Ss to look at picture B2 then distinguish greetings -Ask Ss to practice in pairs Eg: S1:Good [morning] S2:Good [morning] -Give some situation and ask Ss to practice (Eg:when you meet your friend in the morning what you say?) -Ask Ss to look at the B3a and introduce the conversation between Miss Hoa and Ss -read and guide ss read -Explain new words -Look at and distinguish -work in pairs -Practice 1:Listen and repeat: *New words: -morning(n) -afternoon (n) -evening (n) -night (n) -bye (n) *Grammar: +Good morning:Lời chào buổi sáng +Good afternoon:Lời chào buổi chiều (From12a.m to 6p.m) +Good evening:Lời chào buổi tối  Good morning/afternoon/evening: formal than Hi/Hello using to greet some one and must use right time of day +Googbye:Tạm biệt (bye: informal) +Good night:Chúc ngủ ngon -Look at and listen 2.Practice with a partener: -Listen and repeat Eg: S1:Good [morning] S2:Good [morning] -Ask Ss to practce in groups -Do the same with coversationB3b then ask Ss to work in pairs III.Practice: -Ask Ss to read B4 to get main idea -Guide Ss to complete the dialogue -Call on Ss to read the completed dialogue -Correct mistakes -Listen and write -Work in groups 3.Listen and repeat: -Listen and practice -We are =We’re -children(n) -Mom -Scan -Do ex -Work in pairs 4.Write: Lan: Good afternoon,Nga Nga: Good afternoon,Lan Lan: How are you? Nga: I’m fine,thanks And you? Lan: Fine, thanks Nga:Goodbye Lan: Bye -Listen and correct Consolidation : -Greetings at diferent time -Say goodbye 5.Home work: -Do ExB1,2,3(workbook) P6-7 -Prepare C1-2 Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 5: Unit 1: GREETINGS Section C: HOW OLD ARE YOU ? Lesson 4: C1,2 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges :-By the end of the lesson ss will be able to count from one to twenty with a partner 2.Skills: -Practice skills 3.Attitde: Ss will be ablle to count from one to twenty with a partner II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: cadinal numbers (from to 20) 2.Technique: pair work & individual work III.Teaching aids: -T: Text book, plan, number cards -Ss: Text books, notebooks IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting Who is absent to day? 2.Check the pre-lesson -Work in pair go to the board make up similer dialogues base on B4 in Student’s book ( greeting, say goodbye,asking about healthy) New leson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities I.Warm up When we say 1,2,3 what are those? -Today we’re going to learn cadinal numbers -Listen & answer Contents Unit 1: Greetings Section C: How old are you? ( C1- C2) -Listen II.Presentation Listen and repeat -Ask ss to look at the table of numbers (p17) -Read and guide ss read( twice) -Write numbers on the board -Explain form of numbers: +Add ‘teen,, after numbers 4,5,6,7,8,9 we have numbers 14,15,16,17,18,19 Eg: four -> fourteen six -> sixteen seven -> seventeen Notice: five -> fif + teen Do not add ‘teen , after 1,2,3,10 -Look at & listen -Listen & repeat -Listen & write - Listen & remember -Practice -Ask ss to drill -Call on some ss count before class III.Practice -Rub out some numbers then ask ss to remember -Ask ss to count: +Count from -> 20 + Count 1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15,17,19 + Count 2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18,20 Cadinal numbers: 1.One -> 11.Eleven 2.Two -> 12 Twelve 3.Three -> 13.Thirteen 4.four -> 14.Fourteen Five -> 15.Fifteen 6.Six -> 16 Sixteen 7.Seven -> 17.Seventeen 8.Eight ->18 Eighteen 9.Nine -> 19.Nineteen 10.Ten -> 20.Twenty +Add ‘teen,, after numbers 4,5,6,7,8,9 we have numbers 14,15,16,17,18,19 Eg: four -> fourteen six -> sixteen seven -> seventeen Notice: five -> fif + teen + not add ‘teen , after 1,2,3,10 2.Practice -remember & read -Practice S1: one,three, five,seven, nine S2:two, four, six eight G1: Một G2: One G3: write ‘one, -Divide class in to groups: +G1: Read numbers in cards in -Work in groups Viet Namese + G2: Speak in Enghlish +G3: Write numbers in Enghlish on the board Consolidation: -Cadinal number from to 20 5.Home work: -Learn by heart numbers -Count things in your house -Do exC1(p7) in work book -Prepare C,4,5,6 Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 6: Unit 1: GREETINGS Section C: HOW OLD ARE YOU ? Lesson 5: C3,4&5 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson ss will be able to introduce oneslf and others +Ask and answer about age 2.Skills:-Practice skills Attitude:Ss will be ablle to in troduce oneselt and other , ask and answer about age II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: this, year,old, is 2.Grammar: + This is +How old are you? I’m III.Teaching aids -T: Text book, plan, pictures -Ss: Text book, notebook IV.Procedure 1.Greeting Who is absent to day? 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board count and write these numbers in Enghlish: a) 1,3,5,17,19 b)2,4,8,11,15 c) 6,16,20,18,13 d) 7,9,10,12,14 3.New lesson Teacher’s activvities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Play game ‘Slap the board, with the numbers: 13 -Play game 11 Unit 1: Greetings Section C: How old are you? ( C1- C2) 17 15 -Ask ss to intruduce their name Introduce and age in Viet Namese -Today we’re going to learn -Listen intrduce ohter & ask about age II.Presentation -Ask ss to open their books(p18) & look at the top picture ?Who are they? -Introduce content of the conversation and read -Guide ss to read dialogue -Ask ss to look at the picture and read the conversation between Ba, Phong & Nam -Guid ss read -Explain new words and grammar *How old are you? I am (years old) Ask and answer about age Eg: How old are you? I am 12 years old -Teacher introduce s: My name is Chi -Teacher show a student and say: This is Lan *This is + name Introduce other -Ask ss to practice C3 in group (correct pronunciation) III.Practice -Look at th picture & listen -Listen -Listen & repeat 1.Listen and repeat *New words -This (pron) -year(s) (N) -old (n) *Grammar (1)Ask and answer about age: -Look at & listen -Listen & repeat -Listen & write How old are you? I am (years old) Eg: How old are you? I am 12 years old (2)Introduce other: Eg :This is Lan This is + name -Work in groups 2.Practice -Ask age some ss: S1:Hello,Minh.This is Ngoc Eg: How old are you? S2:Hello,Ngoc -Ask ss to ask your -Answer the How old are you? classmates’age question S3: I’m eleven years old -Ask ss to practice in group -Work in pairs make similar dialogues base on C3 -Work in groups Consolidation -Introduce other:This is -Ask& answer about age: How old are you? I’m (yearsold) 5.Homework -Do ex C2,3,4(p8,9,10) in work book -Prepare Unit A1-4 _ Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 7: Unit 2: AT SCHOOL Section A: COME IN Lesson 1: A1,2,3 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the teacher’s commands by classroom imperatives 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude : Ss will be able to understand the teacher’s commands by classroom imperatives II.Language contents 1.Vocabulary: come in, sit down, stand up, close , open, book 2.Grammar: Simple commands III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures Ss: Text books, notebooks IV.Procedure 1.Greeting : Who is absent to day ? 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss to the board and ex 2,3(p10) in work book 3.New lesson T's activities Sts' activities Contents I.Warm up -Revise some sentences they have learned Eg: Hi, Nam Good morning Unit 2: At school Section a: come in ( A1-a4) -Listen & revise My name is Nga How are you? II.Presentation -Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book (p20) ?What is teacher doing? -Read A1 and ask ss to repeat (2 time) -Explain the commands using guesture and pictures -Ask ss to repeat the commands they have just guessed -Read some commands & ask ss follow Eg: T says: Stand up Sit down -Ask ss to look at the pictures A2(p21) ?What are they doing? -Ask ss to read commands in the box -Let ss match right commands with right picture Eg: a) Open your book -Call on ss to answer -Correct and give key -Have ss to write the commands in their notebook -Look at & answer 1.New words -come (v) -sit (v) >< stand (v) -open (v) >< close (v) -book (n) -Listen & repeat -Look at & guess 2.Grammar -Listen & repeat The simple commands: -Sit down - Stand up - Come in - Close your book - Open your book -obey the teacher -Look at & discribe the pictures -Read silently -Match 3.Practice a Open your book b Sit down c Come in d Cloes your book Stand up -Answer -Listen & correct -Write down III.Practice -Guide ss play game ‘Simon Say, -Play game Consolidation: - The simple commands 5.Home work: -Learn by heart commands -Do ex A1,2 (P11,12) in work book -Prepare B1,3 Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 8: Unit 2: AT SCHOOL Section B: WHERE DO YOU LIVE ? Lesson 2: B 1,2 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for and give personal information (name, address, age ) + Learning the Enghlish alphabet 2.Skills:-Practice skills Attitude : Ss will be able to ask and give personal information (name , address, age ) II.Language contents 1.Vocabulary: What, Where, live, on,in,street 2.Grammar: What is your name? My name is Where you live? I live on III Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, the poster of English alphabet Ss: Text books, notebooks IV.Procedure 1.Greeting Who is absent to day? Check the pre-lesson - A student give commands others obey commands 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Play game’ Jumple words, -sti wdno > -atsdn pu > -onemc ni > - dogbeoy > -Play game: -Sit down -Stand up -Come in -Googbye II.Presentation -Ask ss to look at the 1st picture (P23) -Look at & answer ?Where is it? ?Is it in city or country? Why? ?What you when you meet your friends the first time? -Ask ss to look at the picture -Look at &Listen B1 & introduce conversation -Ask ss to listen to -Listen conversation B1 to know how to ask and answer about name Unit 2: At school Section B: Where you live? (B1-B3) 1.New words: -where (pron) -what (pron) -street (n) -live (v) -on (pre) -in (pre) & address -Read B1 & ask ss to read -Explain some new words and structures in the dialogue -Practice th dialogue with a student -Guide ss to practice -Call on some pairs perform before class.(correct pronunciation) -Ask ss to practice in pairs ask & answer about name, age address Eg: S1:What’s your name? S2:My name is S1:How old are you? S2:I’m years old S1:Where you live? S2:I live on -Call on some pairs perform before class -Hang the English alphabet on the board & introduce -Read & guide ss to read *notice some diffecunt letters: G, H,J,U,W ,X, Y,Z,E, I -Ask ss to practice -Choose any letters then ask ss to pronounce Eg: A, G, H, I -Listen & repeat -Listen & write -Practice with teacher -Work in pairs -Preform before class 2.Grammar: (1)What is your name? My name is Nam => Ask & answer about name Eg:What’s your name? My name is Minh -Work with a partner (2)Where you live? I live on Tran Phu street =>Ask & answer about address Eg:Where you live? I live on Le Loi street -Practice -Look at & listen -Listen & repeat 3.Practice The English alphabet -read the alphabet -Read III.Practice -Give some information& ask ss to make similar dialogues base on B1 a.Minh/ 11 years old/ Li Thuong Kiet street b.Trung/ 12 years old/ Nguyen Trai street -Ask ss to complete the open dialogue: A:What your name? B:My name .Hoa -Work in pairs make similar dilogues -Complete the dialogue 4.Practice with a partner Eg:a.What’s your name? My name’s Minh How old are you? I’m 11 years old Where you live? I live on Li Thuong Kiet street -Complete A: you live? B:I on Le Loi street -Call on ss answer -Correct & give key -Answer -Listen& correct A.Whats your name? B My name’s Hoa A Where you live? B I live on Le Loi street Consolidation: -Asking for & give personal information -English alphabet 5.Home work: -Learn by heart English alphabet and structures -Do ex B3,4 (P12,13) in work book -Prepare B4-6 _ Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 9: Unit 2: AT SCHOOL Section B: WHERE DO YOU LIVE ? Lesson 3: B3,4&5 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to spell one’s name or word + Further practice about personal information 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude : Ss will be ablle to spell one’s name or word and practice about personal information II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: spell, 2.Grammar: How you spell it? Prossesive pronouns: My- your III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures Ss: Text books, notebooks IV.Procedure 1.Greeting Who is absent to day? Check the pre-lesson -Work in pair ask & answer about your friend’s personal information -Learn by heart the alphabet 3.New lesson Teacher’sactivities Sts’ activities I.Warm up -Let ss spell these letter: H – G – W – Z – U – A -Listen & spell Contents Unit 2: At school Section B: Where you live? (b3-b5) II.Presentation -When you don’t listen to one’s name clearly what you do? -Ask ss to look at the picture B4(25) ?Who are they? ?What is teacher doing? 1.Listen and repeat -Listen & answer -Look at & answer -Read the conversatoin then guide ss read times -Listen & repeat *notice: Pronunciation spell it what’s your -Ask ss to find out new words -Find out -Explain prossesive pronoun -Listen & write I > My You > your After my / your +noun Eg: My book/ your name but I/ you +verb/ be Eg:I am Lan I live on Tran Phu street -Explain the question: *How you spell it/ your name? =>Ask other spell their names or words that you don’t listen clearly -Have ss to practice B4 in pairs -Ask ss to spell their names before class -Listen & write (+)New words: - spell (v) - my (pron) - your (pron) (+)Grammar: -Prossesive pronouns: I > My You > your Eg: My book/ your name Eg:I am Lan I live on Tran Phu street -How you spell it? L-A-N 2.Practice spelling your name with a partner -Work in pairs -Speel their names III.Practice 3.Practice -Ask ss to make up similar dialogues base on B4 -Ask ss to read the questions B5(p25) -Pratice with a student The answers: a.My name is b.I’m .years old c.I live on d -Work in pairs: -Read B5 -Have ss to work in pairs practice B5 -Call on some pairs practice before class -Ask ss to write the answers a-c about yourself in notebook -Practice with teacher -Work in pairs -Practice before class -Write the answers Consolidation :-Asking for & give personal information -Spell one’s name or word -Prossesive pronouns 5.Home work: -Learn by heart English alphabet and structures -Spell famous names’people -Do ex B5,6 (P13) in work book -Prepare C1-2 _ Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 10: Unit 2: AT SCHOOL Section C: MY SCHOOL Lesson : C1 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges:-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to introduce people and objects at cshool (singular) +Ask and answer about people & things (yes-no question) 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude : Ss will be able to introduce people and objects at school , ask and answer about people and things (yes –no question ) II.Language contents 1.Vocabulary: things at school, student, teacher 2.Grammar: This/ That is Is this/ that .? Yes,it is/ No, it isn’t Indefinite articles : a /an III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, real objects Ss: Text books, notebooks IV.Procedure 1.Greeting Who is absent to day? 2.Check the pre-lesson - Give some photos of famous people, ask ss to spell their names 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up ?What is your name? ?How old are you? ?Where you live? ?How you speel your name? II.Presentation -Ask ss to look at the top picture (p26) ?Where is it? -Introduce word ‘School, Write on the board & ask ss to repeat -Ask ss to look at other pictures to introduce words ‘classroom, ‘teacher, ‘student, ‘desk, -Giude ss read words in chorus & individual -Ask ss to look at the pictures C2(p28) -Read & guide ss read -Write words on the board & ask ss to fill meaning - Call on ss practise C2 -Matching A with B: Student trường học Teacher cái bàn School học sinh Class giáo vien Desk lớp học -Read & ask ss to read C1 -Explain the structures & the different between ‘This, & ‘That,: +Show a student sits near T & says: This is a student +Show a student sits at the back of classroom & says: That is a student *This is Introduce an object or a person near -Answer the questions about themselves -Look at & answer -Listen, write & repeat -Listen &copy down -Practise in chorus & individual -Look at & listen -Listen & repeat -Copy down -Read aloud -Matching Unit 2: at school Section c: MY SCHOOL (C1) 1.New words -school (n) -teacher (n) -student (n) -Classroom (n) -desk (n) - a door (n) -a windown (n0 -a board (n) -a clock (n) -a wast basket (n) -a school bag (n) -a pencil (n) -a pen (n) -a ruler (n) -an eraser (n) 2.Grammar -This is my school That is my class -Listen & repeat -Listen & remember *This is Introduce an object or a person near speaker Eg: This is a book *That is Introduce an object or a person far from speaker Eg: That is a desk -Listen & copy down -Yes/ No question: Eg: This is a book >Is this a book? Yes ,it is/ No, it isn’t Eg: That is a desk >Is that a desk? Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t -Listen & copy down This is That is Is this a/an book desk a/an book? speaker Eg: This is a book *That is Introduce an object or a person far from speaker -Listen & copy Eg: That is a desk down -Explain form of Yes-No question: Eg: This is a book >Is this a book? Yes ,it is/ No, it isn’t Eg: That is a desk >Is that a desk? -Practise in pairs & Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t individual -Explain the different between a /an *a: Before a singular count noun and a consonant sound Eg; a book, a door * an: Before a singular count noun and a vowel sound.(u, o, a,e, i) Eg: an eraser -Call on ss practise C1 III.Practise that desk? -Yes, it is/No, it isn’t a /an *a: Before a singular count noun and a consonant sound Eg; a book, a door * an: Before a singular count noun and a vowel sound.(u, o, a,e, i) Eg: an eraser 3.Practice Eg: This is a window That is a door Is this a window? Yes, it is No, it isn’t -Ask ss to introduce objects in classroom using :This/ -Make sentences That is Eg: This is a window That is a door -Ask ss to change those sentences in to Yes/ No -Change into question questions Eg: Is this a window? Consolidation: -This/ That is - Is this/ that .? Yes,it is/ No, it isn’t 5.Home work: -Learn by heart new words -Make sentences with stuctures then chang into Yes/No questions -Do ex 1,2 (p14) in work book -Prepare C3-4 Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 11: Unit 2: AT SCHOOL Section C: MY SCHOOL Lesson : C2,3 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about things at school 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude: - Ss will be able to ask and answer about things at school II.Language contents 1.Vocabulary: classroom vocabulary (revise) 2.Grammar: +What is this? It is a/ an +What is that? It is a/ an III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, real objects Ss: Text books, notebooks IV.Procedure 1.Greeting Who is absent to day ? 2.Check the pre-lesson - Ask Ss to introduce objects around class room using This/ that is Eg: This is a board 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents Unit 2: At school Section c: MY SCHOOL (C 2,3- I.Warm up -Guide ss play game ‘Jumple words, with these words -Listen & prepare 4) +oarbd = board Jumple words +wdoniw = window +oarbd = board +aserer = eraser +wdoniw = window +celpni =pencil +aserer = eraser +ulre = ruler +celpni =pencil +esdk = desk +ulre = ruler -Call ss go to the board +esdk = desk write correct words -Go to the board & write the correct words II.Presentation -Ask ss to read C2 again -Show any things aroud class -Read C2 1.Practice with a partner & ask ss to say in Enghlish -Look at & say -Introduce the questions: What is this ? It’s -Listen & write down that ? a/an What is this ? It’s that ? a/an Eg: What is this? Eg: What is this? It’s a board It’s a board What’s that? What’s that? It’s an eraser -Listen It’s an eraser -Revise using ‘a/ an, Eg: a book, a pen an eraser -Models with a student Eg: What is this? It’s a desk -Ask ss to practice in pairs ask & answer about pictures C2 -Call on some pairs practice III.Practice -Show any things in classroom then ask ss What is this/ that? -Work in small groups ask & answer things in classroom -Practice with teacher -Work in pairs -Present 2.Practice -Look at & answer -Work in groups Consolidation : -What is this/ that ? -It’s a/ an 5.Home work: -Learn by heart stucture -Do exC3 (p14) in work book -Prepare unit (A1-2) Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 12: Unit 3: AT HOME Section A: MY HOUSE Lesson : A1,2 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to introduce objects in the house and drill “What-questions,, with this/ that/ these/those 2.Skills: Practice skills 3.Attitude :Ss will be able to introduce objects in the house and drill “what question “” II.Language contents 1.Vocabulary: living room vocabulary 2.Grammar: +What is this/that? It is a/ an +What are these/ those? They are III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, real objects Ss: Text books, notebooks IV.Procedure 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Two Ss go to the board practice Ex3 in workbook (p15-16) Eg: S1:What’s that? S2:That’s a clock 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Point the window & ask ss ?Is that a window? -Show the book & ask ss ? Is that a pen? Unit 3: At home -Look at & answer Section A: MY HOUSE (A1-2) II.Presentation -Ask Ss to look at pictures A1(p30) Then listen & repeat -Call on Ss read -Ask Ss to look at the picture A1(p30) & read words -Introduce new words by pictures -Giude Ss to read new words again (notice pronunciation ) -Ask Ss to use This/That is to introduce objects in the picture Eg: This is a lamp -Point any objects in the picture & call Ss to introduce them in English -Explain the different between: This- That / These- Those *Show a pen then speak: This is a pen Show pens then speak These are pens -Ask Ss to find out the difference “ This is /These are ,, -Give the using of This/These: +To introduce objects near speaker +This is + singular -Look at ,listen & repeat -Read aloud -Look at ,listen & repeat -Copy down -Listen & repeat -Practice 1.New words -house (n) -living room (n) -lamp (n) -telephone (n) -couch (n) -table (n) -chair (n) -armchair (n) -bookshelf (n) -stereo (n) -television (n) -stool (n) -Introduce 2.Grammar -Listen & write down -Answer -Listen & copy down * This is /These are =>Giới thiệu đồ vật gần +This is + singular +These are + prular Eg: This is a chair These are armchairs *That is /Those are =>Giới hiệu đồ vật xa +That is + singular +Those are + prular Eg: That is a lamp Those are books +These are + prular -Do the same with “That /Those, -Ask ss to find out the difference “That is/Those are,, -Give consolusion: +To introduce objects far from speaker +That is + singular +Those are + prular -Explain form of prular: +Add “s,, after singular noun Eg: a pen -> pens a book -> books +Add “ es,, afer noun end “o, s, x, ch ,, Eg: a box -> boxes a couch -> couches -Revise the question: What is this ?/ What is that? -Ask Ss to look at the picture A2 (p31) & Ask how many armchairs there are -Explain questions: What are these ? They are What are those ? They are -Read & guide Ss to read A2 -Ask ss to practice in pairs -Ask Ss to look at the picture A2 & ask and asnswer about objects in the picture -Listen -Answer -Copy down -Listen & write +Add “ es,, after nouns end “o, s, x, ch ,, Eg: a box -> boxes a couch -> couches -Listen & write -Look at & answer -Listen & copy down -Listen & repeat -Work in pairs -Wor in pairs III.Practice -Use the pictures and real objects.Ask & answer Eg: What is this/ that? It’s a table What are these/ those? They are books -Call on some pairs practice (+)Change singular into prular: +Add ‘s, after singular : Eg: a pen -> pens a book -> books -Look at & listen -Work in pairs 4.Consolidation -These are /Those are -What is this/ that ? +It’s a/ an (+)Ask & answer about objects +What is this ? It’s a table +What is that ? It’s a window +What are these ? They are stools +What are those ? they are armchairs III.Practice What is this/ that? It’s a table What are these/ those? They are books -What are these/those ? +They are 5.Home work: -Learn by heart vocabulary -Drill stuctures -Do exA1-2(p17-18) in work book -Prepare unit (A3-4) Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 13: Unit 3: AT HOME Section A: MY HOUSE Lesson : A3,4 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to discribe the family and ask & answer about personal informations , amount 2.Skills: -Practice skills 3.Attitude : Ss will be able to discribe the family and ask anf answer about personnal informations , amount II.Language contents 1.Vocabulary: mother, father, brother , sister ,family 2.Grammar: +Who is this/that? This/ That is +What is his/ her name? His/Her name is +How many .? There is/ are +Personal pronouns – Possessive Pronouns III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures Ss: Text books, notebooks IV.Procedure 1.Greeting Who is absent to day? Check the pre-lesson -Two Ss go to the board practice Ex2 in workbook (p18-19) Eg: Pb- S1:What’s that? S2:That’s a lamp 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Control Ss play game “Slap the board,, -Play game Unit 3: At home Section A: MY HOUSE (A3-4) lamp p table chair couc h bookshelf f stereo 2.Presentation -Ask Ss to look at the pictures (p32) then introduce Ba’s family and their relatives -Read the text then guide Ss to read (twice) -Explain new words -Ask Ss to read new words -“Rub out and remember,, some words to check comprehension -Explain grammar in lesson: *Pronoun & Possessivepronoun I > My She -> Her He -> His You -> Your + Personal pronoun + verb/be +Possessivepronoun+ Noun Eg: This is my book n I am twelve years old *Introduce one’s job: Eg: I’m a student She is a teacher *’Too,:at the end of sentence maening ‘còng, (+)Ask & answer about number: Eg:How many people are there in your family, Ba? There are four -Ask Ss to read about Ba’s family -Have ss to read the questions A4(p33) -Introduce the questions about name, age (the 3rd person) -Giude ss to read questions A4 -Lool at & listen -Listen & repeat 1.New words -mother (n) -father (n) -brother (n) -sister (n) -family (n) -person > people -Listen & write -Listen & repeat -Complete words 2.Grammar *Pronoun & Possessive -Listen & write pronoun I > My She -> Her He -> His You -> Your + Personal pronoun + verb/be +Possessivepronoun+ Noun Eg: This is my book n I am twelve years old -Listen & write *Introduce one’s job: Eg: I’m a student She is a teacher I am She /He is -Read aloud -Listen & repeat -Listen & write a/ an + job (+)’Too,:at the end of sentence meaning ‘còng, Eg: I’m a teacher She is a teacher, too (+)Ask & answer about number: Eg:How many people are there in your family, Ba? There are four (+)Ask & answer about name , age( the 3rd person) (+)What’s his/her name? His/ Her name’s (+)How old is he/ she? He /she is (+)Who’s this/that? This/that is II.Practice 3.Practice -Ask Ss to ask and answer about Ba’s family -Call on some pairs practice -Ask ss tell about their family base on A3 -Call on some ss to present before class -Correct -Work in pairs a.What’s her name? Her name’sNga -Present b.What’shis name? -Tell their family His name’s Ha c.Who’s that? That’s Ba How old is he? He’s twelve years old -Listen & correct d.Who’s this? This’s Lan How old is she? she’s fifteen 4.Consolidation +Who is this/that? This/ That is +What is his/ her name? His/Her name is +How many .? There is/ are +Personal pronouns – Possessive Pronouns 5.Home work: -Learn by heart vocabulary -Drill stuctures -Do exA3-4(p19-20) in work book -Prepare unit (B1-2) …………………………………………………………… Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 14: Unit 3: AT HOME Section B: NUMBERS Lesson : B1,2 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges:-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to count from one to one hundred +Use singular and prular in English +Count objects in classroom +Ask &answer about numbers -Use singular and prular in English 2.Skills:-Practice skills Attitude : Ss will be able to count from one to one hundred II.Language contents 1.Vocabulary: Numbers from to 100 2.Grammar: How many .are there ? There is /are III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, picture Ss: Text books, notebooks IV.Procedure Greeting Who is absent to day? Check the pre-lesson -Two Ss go to the board practice Ex4 in workbook (p20-21) Eg: Pb- S1:What’s her name? S2:Her name’s Hoa S1:How old is she? S2:She’s 11 years old New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Write some numberson the -Look at & count boardsuch as 2, 4,7,11,13 -Ask ss to count II.Presentation -Ask ss to look at the numbers B1 (p36) then guide ss to read -Explain the form ofnumbers: +Change “teen,, > “ty,, Eg: thirteen > thirty Fifteen ->fifty +21 = twenty –one 22 = twenty two 42 = forty two -Have ss to read B1 (p35) from to 100 & B1 (p36) 10,20 -Call on ss count numbers + >9; 10 > 19; 20 >29 +10,20,30,40,50 100 -Ask ss to look at picture B2 (p36) then count the items in the classroom -Look at & repeat -Copy down Unit 3: At home Section B: MY HOUSE (B1-2) 1.Listen & repeat numbers -ten -10 -sixty -60 -twenty -20 -seventy-70 -thirty -30 -eighty -80 -forty -40 -ninety -90 -fifty -50 -one hundred-100 -Listen & repeat -Practice -Look at & count +Change “teen,, > “ty,, Eg: thirteen > thirty Fifteen ->fifty +21 = twenty –one 22 = twenty two 42 = forty two -Fill in -Find out 2.Practice -Fill numbers of objects in a box -Ask Ss tofind out the different between singular & prular noun in English -Explain how to change singular into prular: *Add “s,, after singular Eg: a book >books a board > boards *if nouns finish by “s, o, x, ch ,,+ “es,, Eg: a bench > benches a couch > couches -Read model & pronunciation /s/, /z/, /iz/ *Nouns end = es -/iz/ Eg: benches, couches, houses +Nouns end= k,p,t -/s/ Eg: desks, students, lamps +Nouns end = r,w,n, l -/z/ Eg: rulers, tables, windows -Ask ss to count numbers objects in the slassroom -Have Ss to look atB3 & read (twice) -Retell the question “How many ?,, *How many +prular + are there? There is + singular There are + prular -Ask ss to practice B3 + How to change singular into prular: -Listen & copy down *Add “s,, after singular Eg: a book >books a board > boards *if nouns finish by “s, o, x, ch ,,+ “es,, Eg: a bench > benches a couch > couches - Pronunciation /s/, /z/, /iz/ -Listen *Nouns end = es -/iz/ Eg: benches, couches, -Copy down houses +Nouns end= k,p,t -/s/ Eg: desks, students, lamps +Nouns end = r,w,n, l -/z/ Eg: rulers, tables, windows *Ask & answer about -Count numbers: How many doors are there? -Listen & repeat There is one How many windows are -Copy down there? There are two How many+ prular+are there? There is + singular -Work in pairs There are +prular III.Practice 3.Practice -Write some numbers ask ss -Cunt numbers to count.(Eg: 20; 23; 57; 98 ) -Work in pairs -Ask ss to look at the pictureB2 ask & answer about numbers Eg: How many doors are Eg: How many doors are there? There is one How many students are there? There are two there? There is one How many students are -Present there? There are two -Correct -Call on some pairs present before class -Correct 4.Consolidation: + Numbers from to 100 + How many .? There is/ are + Singular & prular 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures ………………………………………………………………… Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 15: Unit three: AT HOME Section B: NUMBERS Lesson : B3,4&5 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges:-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to count objects in livingroom +Ask &answer about nu 2.Skills:-Practice skills Attitude: Ss will be able to count objects in livingroom II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: Livingroom vocabulary (revise) Grammar: How many .are there ? There is /are III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures Ss: Text books, notebooks IV.Procedure Greeting Who is absent to day? Check the pre-lesson -Two Ss go to the board practice ExB3 in workbook (p22) Eg: S1:How many tables are there? S2:There are twenty five tables -Call on somess to count numbers: 32; 45; 67; 70; 100; 58 New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Control ss to play game “Chain game,, S1:In our classroom, there are twenty students S2: In our classroom, there are twenty students, one teacher S3: -Playgame II.Presentation -Ask Ss to retell the question “How many are there?,, +How many + prular + are there ? There is + singular Thereare + prular Eg: How many books are there on the table? There are four books -Show any items in classroom (door, window, couch ) & ask ss about number -Ask Ss to look at the picture B5 (p37)& tell things in livingroom -Have ss to read *Notice: Person > people -Ask ss to count & fill in the items -Call on Ss to count aloud -Ask ss to ask and answer number items in living room Eg: How many couches are there? There is one -Correct III.Practice -Ask ss to work in groups & practise asking about number Eg:-How many girls are there in your group? -How many boys are there in your group? Unit 3: At home Section B: MY HOUSE (B3-5) 1.Ask & answer about numbers: -Retell Eg: How many books are there on the table? There are four books -Look at & answer How many+ prular+are there? There is + singular There are +prular -Look at & tell -Listen & repeat -Count -Read aloud -Work in pairs -Correct 2.Practice -Work in groups Eg: How many [couches] are there? There is one -How many tables are there in your group? -Callon ss practice -Correct -Practice -Correct 4.Consolidation: + How many .? There is/ are 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures -Do exB4(p22) in work book -Prepare unit (C1-2) Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 16: UNIT THREE: AT HOME Section C: Families Lesson : C1,2 + Test 15’ I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read the text about family and talk about jobs 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude: Ss will be ablle to read the text about families and talk about jobs II.Language contents 1.Vocabulary: doctor , nurse , engineer , our, their 2.Grammar: - Possesive pronouns - Ask and answer abuot job III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure 1.Greeting Who is absent to day? 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ask ss to look at the picture in ExB3 in workbook (p22) Eg: S1:How many windows are there? S2:There aretwo windows 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Ask ss some questions -Listen and answer ?How many people are there in your family? ?What’syour father’s name? ?How old is he? Unit 3: At Home C: FAMILY(C1,2) ?What’s your mother’s name? ?How old is she? II.Presentation -Ask ss to look at the -Look at and answer picture C1 (p38) ?How many people are there? -Listen to the teacher ?Who are they? & guess information -We’re going to read a text about her family and jobs of members in her family.You listen and find out new words & compelete the table How Job? old ? Father 40 engineer Mother 35 teacher Brother student -Read the text (twice) -Ask ss to complete the table -Give correct answer -Explain some new words -Have ss to read the text silently -Call on ss to read aloud -Ask ss to look at & read the questions c, d to introduce new sructures -Ask ss to retell possesive pronouns they have learned and give possesive pronouns (prular) + We > our +they > their Eg: These are our books pro N Those are their books pro N -Now read the text again -Listen to the text -Complete -Copy down -Read silently -read aloud -Copy down 1.New words -family (n) -engineer (n) -doctor (n) -nurse (n) -our (pro) -their (pro) 2.New structures (+)What does he do? He is an engineer What does she do? She is a teacher =>Ask & answer about job’s other What +does +he/ she +do? He/ she is +a/an + job -Retell -Copy down -Read & answer the questions -Work in pairs -Copy down (+)Possesive Pronouns: + We > our +they > their Eg: These are our books pro N Those are their books pro N 3.Answer the questions: a.There are four people b.He is forty c.He is an engineer d.She is thirty-five e.She is a teacher f.He is eight g.She is a student h.They are in their living room then ask and answer the questions about the text -Call on some pairs practice -Correct and give right answer III.Pactice -Ask ss to look at C2 (p39) & ask ss to tell about Song’s family -Explain word : Mrs (Before family name of the girl who get married ) Eg: Mrs Smith -Practice with a student ask and answer about Song’s family Eg:T:How old is Song? T:What does he do? -Look at and tell -Listen and copy down -Practice with teacher S1:He is12 S1:He is a student -Work in pairs -Ask ss to practice with a -Practice before class partner -Correct -Call on some pairs practice -Tell about their family -Correct (+) Ask ss to talk about their family 4.Practice Ask and answer about Song’s family How many people are there in Song’s family? There are four people How old is his father? He is forty What does he do? He is a doctor (+)Further practice There are four people in my family:My father, my mother, my sister and me 4.Consolidation: Ask and answer about job: +What does he/ she do? He/ she is a/ an -Possesive Pronouns (our, their) 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures -Write about Song’s family -Do ex C1-5 in work book -Prepare Grammar Practice Test 15 (No 1) Read the passage and write T or F to the satements This is Lan’s family.There are four people in her family : her father, her mother, her sister and her.This is her father He is forty five years old He is a doctor This is her mother She is forty-two She is a teacher Hanh is Lan’s sister.She is sixteen.She is a student Lan is thirteen years old.She is a student too 1.There are three people in her family 2.Her father is forty-five years old 3.He is a nurse 4.Her mother is forty- five years old 5.She is a teacher 6.Her sister’s name is Hanh 7.She is sixteen 8.She is a student 9.Lan is fourteen 10.She is a student Key Total :10 points (each true sentence is point) F 2: T 3:F 4: F 5:T 6:T 7: T 8: T 9: F 10: T Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 17: GRAMMAR PRACTICE I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge:-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise main contents of the lessons from unit to3 and prepare for text 2.Skill: Practice skills 3.Attitude : at the end ss will be revise main contents of the lesons of from unit to II.Language contents: Grammar: -To be of present simple tense -Imperative (commands) -How many ? There is/ are -Number from to 100 -Greetings -This /that/ these / those -Question words -Vocabulary class room III.Teaching aids: -T: Text book, plan, pictures -Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Content I.Warm up -Ask ss some questions -Listen and What’s your name? answer How old are you? What’s his name? How old is he? II.Revision -Write some examples on the board & ask ss to revise form of to be -Ask ss to make sentences with tobe -Look at & revise -make example -Ask ss to retell commands using -Listen & repeat in class room -Have ss to revise greetings ( formal and informal) -Ask ss to practice greeting to other -Revise -Retell form of numbers form to 100 -Ask ss to practice counting -Listen & retell -Retell This/ that + is+singular These/ those +are + prular -Ask ss to give exs -Revise & copy down -Make sentences -Revise the question How many are there? Thera is/ are -Practice in pairs -Count -Listen & copy down 1.Revision (1) Tobe: I am He is She It You are We They (I’m) He’s She’s It’s You’re We’re They’re Eg:I am a teacher She is 11 years old What are these ? They are erasers 2.Commands: -Come in -Sit down >< Stand up -Close/ open your book 3.Greetings -Hi/Hello => informal -Good morning/ afternoon/ evening/ night -Good bye/ bye -How are you? 4.Numbers +From 14 to 19 + teen Eg: four > fourteen five > fifteen + Numbers20,30,40,50 90+ty Eg: twenty, thirty, ninety +Numbers 21, 22, 34, 99 Eg: twenty –one; twentytwo, ninety-nine This/ that +is +singular These/ those + are + prular Eg: This is a window These are books 6.How many + prular +are there? There is/ are Eg:How many chairs are -Retell question words: What, Where,How,Who -Listen & revise there? There are four chairs 7.Question words: What: What’s your name? Where: Where you live? How: How old are you? III.Exercise -Ask ss to complete exercises 1- -Listen & ex 2-3(p40) use correct form of tobe -Call on ss answer -Answer -Correct -Correct -Ask ss to read commands ex4 and complete -Call on ss to practice -Read & complete -Work in pairs -Ask ss to look at the picture ex5 -Look at the (p41) ask & answer about picture & practice amount -Call on ss to practice -Work in pairs -Correct -Ask ss to complete the dialogues use question words -call on ss to practice 2.Exercise Ex1:Tobe: I am Nga.I am a student My brother & father is a teachers My brother is a student There are four people in my family Ex2: Tobe: I am Ba.This is Nga She is my friends.We are in the yard My mother & father are in the house Ex3: Tobe: a)How old aer you? I am twelve b)How old is she? She is eleven c)Is he eleven? No, he isn’t d)Are they twelve? No, they aren’t -Listen & complete -Practice Ex4: Commands: a.Come in b)Sit down c.open your book d close your book e stand up Ex5:Answer: a.There is one b.There are six c.There are two d.There is one Ex6:Question words a.What is your name? My name is Nam -Ask ss to go to the board and write the words for the numbers and numbers for the words -Correct -Ask ss to complete the conversation between Thanh & Chi ex8 (p42) -Call on ss to practice -Have ss to look at the pictures use this or that -Call on ss to practice -Guide ss to play game with class room vocabulary b.Where you live? I live in Ha Noi c.Who is that? That is my brother d.what does he do? He is a student -Go to the board Ex7: Number & write a)1 one ; five; eight; 10 ten; 20 twenty; 30 thirty; 50 -Correct fifty; 70 seventy; 90 ninety; 100 one- hundred b) 4; 7; 9; 11; 15; 25; 60; 75; 80 -Read & complete Ex8: Greetings Thanh: Hello Chi: Hello -Work in pairs Thanh:How are you? Chi: I’m fine, thank you How are you? -Complete the Thanh: Fine,thanks dialogues Ex9:This- That -Practice a.that- is –yes b.this-is- no -Play game Ex 10:A picture quiz 1.chair; 2.book; 3.eraser; ruler; eraser; 6.clock; board; 8.window 4.Consolidation: -Retell contents of the lesson 5.Home work: - Do exercises again -Prepare for test 45’ Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 18: TEST OF ENGLISH NO I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss willbe able to drill skills +Listening comprehension the passage about objects in the room +Reading comprehension about Minh’sfamily +Language focus: Choose the correct answer +Writing : Write about yourself II.Teaching aids: T: Photo tests Ss: pens, ruler III.Procedure 1.Matrix Chủ đề I/Listen NhËn biÕt TN Th«ng hiÓu TL VËn dông Céng Cấp độ thÊp Cấp độ cao TN TL TN TL Sè c©u : Sè ®iÓm TØ lÖ : TN TL Sè c©u : Sè ®iÓm TØ lÖ II/Lang uage content choose the best answer Sè c©u : Sè ®iÓm TØ lÖ : 40% Fill in the blanks with the suitable possess ive adjectiv es Sè c©u : Sè ®iÓm :4 TØ lÖ : 40% III/ Writing IV.Read ing Comple te the passage , then answer the questio ns 10 Sè c©u 10 Sè ®iÓm :6.0 TØ lÖ : 60% Tæng sè c©u :18 Tæng sè ®iÓm:1 TØ lÖ : 100% Tæng sè c©u : 14 Tæng sè ®iÓm: 8.0 TØ lÖ : 80% Tæng sè c©u : Tæng sè ®iÓm: 2.0 TØ lÖ : 20% Sè c©u : 10 Sè ®iÓm :6.0 TØ lÖ : 60% Tæng sè c©u :18 Tæng sè ®iÓm:10 TØ lÖ :100% 2.Questions: Test I.Listen and write the missing information This (1) my family There (2) … five people (3) … my family: my father, my mother, my brother, my sister and me We live (4) … Le Loi street II Choose the best answer Her name …… Lan A.are B.does C.is D.do This is … armchair Aa B.the C.an My mother and father … teachers A is B C are D does … are those? - They are my sisters A What B Who C How D Where 9.I……………….a student A.are B.am C is 10…………………is that? It’s a ruler A What B Where C How 11.How old……………you? I’m twelve A is B are C am 12.There are five…………… A desk B desks C deskes II Read the passage Answer the questions This is Minh’s family.There are four people in his family: his father, his mother, his sister and Minh.His father is forty-two.His name’s Nam.He is a doctor.His mother is thirty-seven.She is Lien.She is a teacher.Hanh is his sister.She is sixteen years old.She is a student.Minh is twelve.He is a student,too 13.How many people are there in his family? 14.How old is his father? 15.What does his mother do? 16.What does his sister do? IV Complete the dialogue Tuan: What’s (17) name? Hoa: My name is Hoa Tuan: Where you (18) ? Hoa: I.(19) on Tran Phu Street Tuan: How old (20) you? Hoa: I’m twelve years old Test I Choose the best answer Her name …… Hoa A.are B.does C.is D.do Those are … A.stools B.stool C stooles This is … armchair Aa B.the C.an This is Hoa ans this is … father A his B.your C.her D my III Fill in the blanks with the suitable possessive adjectives 15 What' your name? - … name's Nam 16 He's a student … name's Hung 17 They are engineers .… name are Ba and Tung 18 Lan is here Those are … books II Read the passage Answer the questions This is Minh’s family.There are four people in his family: his father, his mother, his sister and Minh.His father is forty-two.His name’s Nam.He is a doctor.His mother is thirty-seven.She is Lien.She is a teacher.Hanh is his sister.She is sixteen years old.She is a student.Minh is twelve.He is a student,too 13.How many people are there in his family? 14.How old is his father? 15.What does his mother do? 16.What does his sister do? Test I.Choose the best answer 1.I .a student A are B am C is is that? It’s a ruler A Where B What C How 3.How old .you? I’m twelve A is B are C am 4.There are five A desk B desks C deskes II Complete the dialogue Tuan: What’s (5) name? Hoa: My name is Hoa Tuan: Where you (6) ? Hoa: I.(7) on Tran Phu Street Tuan: How old (8) you? Hoa: I’m twelve years old III Complete the passage, then answer the questions This (9) … my family There (10) … five people (11) … my family: my father, my mother, my brother, my sister and me We live (12) … Le Loi street My father is forty years (13) … He is (14) … engineer My mother is thirty- six (15) … is a nurse My brother is seventeen My sister is fourteen I'm eleven We (16) … students * Questions: 17 How many people are there in his family? 18 What does he do?? 3.Key – Mark I.Choose the best answer (2pts) 1-C.is 2-C an 3-C.are 4-B who II.Complete the passage, then answer the questions (6pts) is are in on old 10 an 11 She 12 are Questions: 13 He is an engineer 14 His mother is thirty- six III Fill in the blanks with the suitable possessive adjectives (2pts) 15 your 16 live 17 live 18 are Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 19: UNIT FOUR: BIG OR SMALL ? Section A: Where is your school? Lesson : A1,2 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about location and size of the school + Use possessive:’s +Furether practice the question : How many ? 2.Skills: -Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Love subjects -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: big , small , city, country, in 2.Grammar: Where is Phong’s school ? It’s in the country Is Phong’s school big? Yes,it is / No,it isn’t III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure 1.Greeting: -Who is absent to day? Check the pre-lesson -How many students are there in your class? -How many desks are there ? 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Ask ss some questions -Answer ?What’ s your name? Unit 4: Big or small ?How are you today? A: Where is yourschool? ?How many windows are (A1,2) there in your classroom? ?How many boards are there ? II.Presentation -Aks ss tolook at the pictures A1(p44) then observe the difference between two schools ?Which school is bigger? ?Where are the school? -Introduce the lesson: We’re going to learn about location and size of school identify possession’s -Read the passage (twice) -Guide ss to read (twice) -Explain nwe words and new structures using the pictures in the book -Call on ss to read aloud (2ss) -Ask ss to read the questions A2 (p44) -Guide ss to answer Eg: Is Phong’s school small? Yes,it is -Have ss to practice in pairs -Call on some pairs practie -Correct 1.Listen and read -Look at and answer (+)New words -small (adj)><big (adj) -country (n) >< city(n) (+)New structures (1) Possessive :’s Eg: This is Phong’s school -Listen This is Thu’s school -Name of person+’s +N (2)Size of school It is big -Listen to the text It’s small -Listen & repeat (3) Ask and answer about -Listen & copy location down -Where is Thu’s school? It’s in the city -Practice reading -Is Thu’s school in the country? -Read No, it isn’t -Is Thu’s school in the city? -Answer Yes,it is 2.Answer a/ yes, itis -Work in pairs b/ No, it isn’t -Practice c/ It is in the country -Copy down d/ No,it isn’t -Look at & read -Ask ss to look at A3(p45) read the questions silently -Retell the question about amount -Call on ss to read the text aloud -Have ss to answer the questions -Correct silently -Revise -Read aloud -Work in pairs -Copy down III.Practice -Ask ss to summary information about Phong’s school and Thu’s school -Ask ss some questions about their schools? ?Is your school big /small? ?Where is it? ?How many classrooms are there ? 3.Read Then answer the questions * How many +Prular +are there? There is /are a/There are eight classrooms b/There are four hundreds students c/There are twenty classrooms d/There are nine hundreds students 4.Practice -Complete the table -Answer about their school 4.Consolidation: -Ask and answer about location and size of school: Where is Phong’s school ? It’s in the country Is Phong’s school big? Yes,it is / No,it isn’t -Possesive ‘s 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures -Write about your school -Do ex A 1-2 (p35-36) in work book -Prepare A4-5 +B1 _ Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 20: UNIT FOUR: BIG OR SMALL ? Section A: Where is your school? Lesson : A3, A4 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about grade , class and describe school ( classroom, class , floors) 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude : -Love subjects -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: grade , floor , have, first, second 2.Grammar: -Which grade/ class are you in? I’m in grade / class 6A -Where is your classroom ? It’s on the second floor -How many floors does your school have? It has four floors III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure 1.Greeting: 2.Check the pre-lesson.( Check their homework) 3.New lesson Teacher’s activitives Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Ask ss to answer the questions A4 (p46) and give mark ?Is your school in the country or in the city? ?How many classrooms are there? ?How many students are there? -Correct and give sugesstion -Hang the picture of school on the board ?How many floors ?Where is class 7C? -Now we’re going to describe location of classroom, school, floors -Answer the questions Unit 4: Big or small A:Where is yourschool? (A3,4) 1.Answer -Listen & copy a.My school is in the country down b.There are eight classrooms -Look at and answer c.There are two hundreds students -Listen to introduce 2.Presentation -Show the picture of school and say: This is a big school There are one, two, three floors ?What is maening of floor? -Write ‘floor, on the board and ask ss to repeat There are grade 6, grade7, grade 8, grade in our school.Let’s guess ‘grade, -Point the picture and say: The first floor, the second floor My school has four floors -Use the picture to introduce other words -Read the conversation then ask ss to read -Call on ss to practice the dialogue -Ask ss to find out the questions for these answers: I’m in grade I’m in class 6A It’s on the first floor My school has four floors -Introduce the questions and ‘to have, then write on the board -Look at the picture and listen then tell meaning of words -Copy down & repeat -Listen&guess meaning -Listen &copy down -Listen& repeat -Practice in pairs -Find out the questions in the dialogue -Copy down III.Practice -Ask ss some questions about their school ?Which grade are you in? -Answer the ?Which class are you in? questions ?How many floors does your school have? ?Where is your classroom? -Ask ss to make similar dialogue -Call on some pairs practice -Work in pairs -Correct mistakes -Present 2.Listen and repeat (+)New words -floor(n) -grade (n) -class (n) -first = 1st -second =2nd - to have / has (v) (+)New structures -Which grade are you in? I’m in grade -Which class are you in? I’m in slass 6A => Which grade /class ? -Where is your classroom? It’s on the first floor -How many floors does your school have? = How many floors are there in your school? My school has four floors +Have: co I/you/ we/ they + have He /she /it +has Eg: How many books you have? I have two books III.Practice Eg:Make similar dialogue S1: Hi.Which grade are you in ? S2: I’m in grade S1: Which class are you in? S2: I’m in class 7C What about you ? S1: I’m in grade 6, class 6B How many floors does your school have? S2:It has two floors S1:My school has three floors -Correct & my classroom is on the second floor Where your classroom? S2:It’s on the first floor 4.Consolidation: -Retell the structures: -Which grade/ class are you in? I’m in grade / class 6A -Where is your classroom ? It’s on the second floor -How many floors does your school have? It has four floors 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures -Do ex A3-4 in work book -Prepare B1-5 Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 21: UNIT FOUR: BIG OR SMALL ? Section B: My Class Lesson : B1,2,3,4&5 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges:-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be complete information about Phong’s school, Thu’s school and your school +Use ordinal numbers from 1st to 10th +Complete the opened dialogue +Drill writing, listening, speaking skills 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Love subjects -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: Ordinal numbers from 1st to10th 2.Grammar: Review III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, subboard Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure 1.Greeting: Who is absent to day? 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board practice Ex A4 inworkbook -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities I.Action 1: Complete the table -Ask ss to read conversation between Thu and Phong B1 (p47) Then ask ss ?Which grade is Thu/ Phong in? ?Which class is Thu/ Phong in? ?Where is her/his classroom? -Ask ss to look at the table and complete about Phong’s school and Thu’s school -Call on ss answer -Correct and give information -Ask ss to work in pairs ask and answer about your school Then complete the table -Ask ss to look at ‘you, and write three sentences about you -Call on 2ss go & write on the board -Correct &give sugession -Have ss to read opened dialogue B5 (p48) -Guide ss to complete the dialogue using information from B1 -Call on some pairs practice -Correct II.Action 2: Listen and repeat Ordinal numbers -Ask ss to retell two ordinal numbers they have learned -Now we’re going to learn ordinal numbers from 1st to 10th -Ask ss to look at B4(p48) and listen Contents Unit 4: Big or small B: My Class (B1-5) -Work in pairs 1.Complete the table -Answer -Complete the table -Answer -Correct -Work in pairs -Write down studying cards -Go to the board -Correct & copy -Read -Complete Class Grade Class room’s floor Thu Phong You 6 7C 6A 6B 2nd 1st 3rd 2.Write about you I am in grade I’m in class 6B My classroom is on the first floor 3.Complete the dialogue Thu: Is your school big? Phong: No, it is not Thu: How many floors does it have? Phong:It has two floors Thu:Which class are you in? Phong:I am in class 6A Thu: Where is your classroom? Phong:It’s on the first floor -Work in pairs -Correct -Listen &retell -Listen -Look at &listen 4.Listen and repeat Ordinal numbers -first 1st -second 2nd -third 3rd -fourth 4th -fifth 5th -sixth 6th -seventh 7th -eighth 8th -ninth 9th -tenth 10th +Form: Ordinal numbers ( 4th to10th ): -Have ss to repeat ?Who can tell form of ordinal numbers from 4th to 10th? -Write numbers on the board -Explain form of numbers -Call on ss read numbers -Guide ss to play game “Rub out and remember,, with numbers on the board -Listen&repeat -Answer -Copy down -Listen & copydown -Read aloud -Play game Cadinal number + th = ordinal number Eg: four + th = fourth six + th = sixth *Note: one >first two > second three > thirst III.Practice 5.Practice -Ask ss to write friends’names according to alphabet Eg: Anh is the first Binh is the second -Control ss play game “Lucky number,, +Lucky numbers are: 2,4,6 1.What’s your name? Where is your school? Which class are you in? 7.Which grade are you in? 8.Where you live? 9.How many students are there in your school? 10.Is your school big ? -Practice in groups -Play game in groups and answer the questions Eg: Anh is the first Binh is the second - Lucky numbers 4.Consolidatio:-Retell the structures: +Which grade/ class are you in? I’m in grade / class 6A +Where is your classroom ? It’s on the second floor +How many floors does your school have? It has four floors -Ordinal numbers (1st to 10th ) 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures and learn by heart numbers -Do ex B 1,2, 3,4(p38- 40) in work book -Prepare C1-3 Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 22: UNIT FOUR: BIG OR SMALL ? Section C: Getting ready for school Lesson : C1,2,3 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to ask and answer about everyday activities +Ask and answer about time +Drill writing, listening, speaking skills 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Love subjects -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: get up, get dressed, brush , teeth , wash , face, have, go,breakfast 2.Grammar: -What you every morning? I get up -He gets up -What time is it? It is seven o’clock III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, subboard., clock Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure 1.Greeting Who is absent to day? 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board write the ordinal numbers in words and read aloud -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activites Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Listen & answer Unit 4: Big or small -Ask ss to tell things they brush my teeth, wash often everymorning face , have breakfast C-Getting ready for school (C1-3) -Now we are going to learn about everyday activities II.Presentation I.Listen and repeat -Ask ss to look at the pictures C1 (p49) then guess the -Look at & guess actions in each picture -Write their guessing on the board -Copy down -Guide ss read new words -Read the sentences Ba tells -Listen & repeat (+)New words - to get up (v) -to get dressed -to brush (v) -tooth > teeth (n) -to wash (v) - face (n) himself then guide ss to read twice -Call on ss to read sentences Ba tells himself (Correct pronounciation) -Read and have ss to repeat sentences some one tells about Ba twice -Call on ss to practice -Write some sentences on the board to introduce grammar -Ask ss to make questions for sentences.(1) (2) I get up I brush my teeth everymorning -Ask ss to compare verbs in two pairs sentences.(1) (2) and (3) (4) -Introduce verbs of present simple tense -Ask ss to practice C1 in pairs -Guide ss to practice C2: one asks other answers using C1 (Ba tells himself) -Call on some pairs practice -Ask ss to write Ba’s activities begin with: Every morning,Ba gets up He (note form of verbs) -Ask ss to read aloud their writing -Have ss to look at the picture C4 (p50) and ask some questions ?Who are they? ?Where are they? ?What is Ba doing? -We’re going to learn about time -Read and have ss to repeat -Explain the question asking and answer about time -Have ss to practice the -Listen & repeat -Read aloud -Listen & repeat -Practice -Look at & copy dwon -Make questions -Compare -Listen & copy down -Work in pairs S1:I get up S2:He gets up -Listen & prepare -Work in pairs -Write about Ba’s activites -to have (v) - has - breakfast (n) -go to school (+)Model sentences I get up (1) I brush my teeth (2) Ba gets up (3) He brushes his teeth (4) -What you every morning? I get up (+)Verbs of present simple I/you/We/They +V-infi Eg: I get dressed He/She /It + V-s, es Eg: He gets dressed He washes his face -Verbs end “o, ch, x, s,sh.,+es Eg:brushes , washes 2.Practice with a partner -What you every morning? I get up Then I get dressed , I brush my teeth 3.Write Every morning, Ba gets up He gets dressed He brushes his teeth He washes his face He has breakfast He goes to school -Read aloud 3.Listen and repeat -Look at the picture C4 & answer -Listen -Listen & repeat -Listen & copy down -Work in pairs -present -Correct -late (adj) -tobe late for school /work Eg: We are late for school +Ask and answer about time What time is it? It is + hour + o’clock Eg:What time is it? It is eight o’clock dialogue -Call on some pairs present -Correct III.Practice -Ask ss to look at the clock (+)Other activities ask and answer about time +Ask and answer about time What time is it? -Work in pairs S1:What time is it? It’s seven o’clock S2:It’s nine o’clock -Call on some pairs practice -Control ss to play game : ”Chain game ,,in groups -Practice +Play game about everyday activites T: Everyday, I get up -Listen and play Group1: Everyday, I get up I game get dressed Group 2: Everyday, I get up I get dressed.I brush my teeth 4.Consolidation -Retell the structures: +What you every morning? I get up +He gets up +What time is it? It is seven o’clock 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures and learn by heart new words -Write about your everyday activites -Do ex C2(p41) in work book -Prepare C5-8 Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 23: UNIT FOUR: BIG OR SMALL ? Section C: Getting ready for school Lesson : C4,5,6,7 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges.-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to ask and answer about time of everyday activities +Ask and answer about time +Drill reading, listening, speaking skills 2.Skills.-Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Love subjects -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: everyday activities (review) 2.Grammar: -What time youget up? I get up at six -What time does Ba get up? He gets up at six -What time is it? It is seven o’clock/ It is seven fifteen III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, subboard., clock Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure 1.Greeting Who is absent to day? 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board read aloud the completed passage about Lan’s activites (ExC2-41.) in work book -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activites Sts’ activites Contents I.Warm up -Control ss to play game -Play game Rửa mặt Đi “Slap the board,, Thức dậy -Correct Đánh ăn sáng II.Presntation 1.Listen and read -Ask ss to close their book and listen to C5 (p50) and write the numbers they listen -Ask ss to open their book to check their answer -Call on ss to read the numbers they have listened ?Who can retell the question about time you have learned? -Write on the board and give answer +What time is it? It’s ten o’clock It’s ten ten It’s half past ten =>What time is it? Giờ đúng: It is + hour + o’clock -Listen and write down Ask and answer about time -Open the books and + What time is it? check It’s ten o’clock -read aloud It’s ten ten It’s half past ten -Listen and retell =>What time is it? Giờ đúng: It is + hour +o’clock -Copy down Giờ kém: It is + hour + minutes *Note: Half = thirty -Pay attention 2.Read Giờ kém: It is + hour + minutes -Work in pairs *Note: Half = thirty -Ask ss to practice C5 in pairs -Look at and answer -What time does Ba get up? He gets up at six o’clock -What time does Ba have breakfast? He has breakfast at six thirty -Write the questions about Ba -What time does Ba go to on the board and ask ss to school? answer (close their books) He goes to school at seven What time does Ba get up? fifteen What time does Ba have -Open the books and =>Ask and answer about time breakfast? find out of activities (the 3rd preson) What time does Ba go to -Pay attention & What time + does + he/ she + school? copy down V? -Ask ss to open their books to -Work in pairs He/ She + V(s-es) +at + hour find out the answers C6 (p50) *Note: at + hour -Introduce the structure 3.Answer -Call on some pairs practice What time you get up? reading -Answer I get up at What time you have breakfast? -Work in pairs I have breakfast at -Correct What time you go toschool? -Ask ss to answer the I go to school at questions C7 =>What time + + you + V? -Call on some pairs practice I + V + at + hour -Correct III.Practice 4.Practice -Ask ss to work in pairs -Work in pairs practice asking and answering about these time 8.15 9.30 10.45 11.00 -Ask ss write their time table -Write down -Call on ss to read aloud -Read aloud -Correct Eg: S1:What time is it? S2: It is [ eight fifteen] -Write time table: Eg: Get up : 5.30 Get dressed : 40 4.Consolidation: -Retell the structures: -What time youget up? I get up at six -What time does Ba get up? He gets up at six -What time is it? It is seven o’clock / It is seven fifteen 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures -Write about your time table -Do ex C3,4,5(p41-43) in work book _ Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 24: CORRECTING THE TEST No I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to correct the mistakes in their tests Do exercises 2.Skills: -Practice skills 3.Atitude : -Love subjects -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: words about house, family, numbers 2.Grammar: -To be , introduce oneself and others , numbers III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, work book, sub-board Ss: Text books, notebooks , work book, pens IV.Procedure 1.Greeting: - Who is absent to day? 2.Check the pre-lesson -What time you get up? -What 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Ask ss some questions -Answer the questions ?How are you today? Are you worry about your test ? ?Can you guess result of your test? Is good or bed ? II.Presentation -Remark the written test +Total 14 +Good : +Fair : +Poor: -Revise grammar -Listen to the teacher 1.Remark the test +Total 14 +Good : +Fair : +Poor: -Listen & revise 2.Revise grammar +Tobe of present simple I – am Eg:I am a student She /He/ it – is Eg: She is a teacher We/ You/ They – are Eg: We are doctors Negative : add “not,, after tobe Eg: I’m not a teacher -Copy down -Listen & revise +Question words: What is this/ that?=>ask for object How many .are there? => ask for amount What’ s your/his /her name ? =>ask one’s name How old are you?=> ask one’s age What does your mother/father do?=> ask for job Where you live? => ask address +Singular and prular; articles Eg: a pen > pens a board > boards an eraser > erasers a couch > couches +Preposition: on Eg:I live on Tran Phu street -Copydown -Revise &copy down -Look at the test & correct mistakes -Listen and check the answer -Pay & Correct the test -Read again I.Listen -Read the listening again to ss check the answer -Give correct answer and mark -Correct -Listen and correct -Rewrite (+)Tobe of present simple I – am Eg:I am a student She /He/ it – is Eg: She is a teacher We/ You/ They – are Eg: We are doctors Negative : add “not,, after tobe Eg: I’m not a teacher (+)Question words: What is this/ that? =>ask for object How many .are there? => ask for amount What’ syour/his /her name ? =>ask one’s name How old are you? => ask one’s age What does your mother/ father do?=> ask for job Where you live? => ask address +Singular and prular; articles Eg: a pen > pens a board > boards an eraser > erasers a couch > couches +Preposition: on Eg:I live on Tran Phu street 3.Correct the test I.Choose the best answer ( 0,5 x 4=2points) 1-C.is 2-A.stools 3-C.an 4-C.her II.Complete the passage, then answer the questions ( 0,25 x 8= 4points) is are in on old 10 an 11 She 12 are Questions: ( 0,1 x 2=2points) 13 There are five people in his family II.Reading -Ask ss to read the text and answer again -Correct mistakes III.Language Focus -Explain each sentences and say reason choosing -Give correct answer IV.Writing -Guide ss to write sentences about themselves -Give correctanswer III.Practice -Give some exercises (second board) -Ask ss ex -Correct 14 They live on Le Loi street III Fill in the blanks with the suitable possessive adjectives ( 0,5 x 4=2points) 15 My 16 His 17 Their 18 her -Listen and exercises -Practice -Correct Ex1: Complete the dialogues 1-are 6-teacher 2-is 7-This 3-a 8-is 4-is 9-is 5-is 10-old 4.Consolidation: -Retell contents ofthe lesson 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures -Prepare U5 A1-4 Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 25: UNIT FIVE: THINGS I DO Section A: My Day Lesson : A1-2-3-4 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about everyday activities and activities after school 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Love subjects -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: play , game, homework, housework, watch,listen, read, music 2.Grammar: What does Nga everyday? She gets up at six What you after school? I watch television III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, sub-board Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson 3.New lesson Teacher’s activitives Sts’ activities I.Warm up ?What time you get up? -Listen and ?What timedo you go to school? answer ?What time you go bed? II.Presentation Contents 1.New words -to play(v) ~ game -Ask ss to look at the pictures A1 -Look at and tell -game (n) (p52) then tell what Nga does -to (v) ~ homework everyday ~ housework -Explain the new words using -Pay attention -to watch (v) ~television the pictures and answer the -to listen (v) ~ music question : -to read (v) What does Nga do? -Look at & answer -every (adv) ~ morning Eg: Poit the picture and ask ~ afternoon ss :What does Nga do? -Copy down and ~ evening -Write “play game,, on the board repeat and guide ss toread -Listen & answer -Do the same with other words in 2.Modal sentences A3 (p53) -Practice reading -Call on ss to read new words -Play game a.What does Nga -Play game “Rub out and everyday? remember,, to check vocabulary -Listen & repeat She gets up at six -Read and guide ss to read A1 -Work in pairs What you every day? -Call on ss practice in pairs I go to school (correct pronounciation “doesgoes,,) -Pay attention b.She goes to school -Explain structures:Ask and & copy down c.She plays games answer about everyday activities d.She does her homework +What does Nga everyday? She goes to school =>Ask and answer about +What you every day? everyday activites I go to school b.She goes to school =>Ask and answer about c.She plays games everyday activites -Read aloud d.She does her homework -Ask ss to read the questions A2 (p53) -Work in pairs -Ask ss to practice in pairs -Retell about Nga -Call on ss to retell Nga’s 3.Then practice the dialogue activities -Listen & repeat with a partner -Ask ss to look at A3 listen & repeat -Have ss to practice in pairs -Explain structure What you after school? I watch television =>Ask and answer about activities after school Ask ss to read A3 (p53) about after school activities -Ask ss to read the questions A4 (p54) a-d -Ask ss to read A3 (p53) about after school activities -Ask ss to read the questions A4 (p54) a-d -Guide ss to answer the questions -Call on ss practice -Correct and ask ss to copy down III.Practice -Ask ss : ?What you every day? ?What you after school? -Call on other ss to tell about their friends’ activities base on the answer -Practice in pairs -Pay attention What you after school? I watch television =>Ask and answer about activities after school 4.Answer Then write the -Read aloud A3 answer Read the questions a.Lan does the housework A4 b.Ba watches television -Listen & answer c.Thu reads d.Nam listens to music -Work in pairs -Listen & copy down 5.Practice -Listen and answer -Tell about their friends S1:What you everyday? S2: I play game.I my homework S3: retell She/he plays game She/ he does her /his homework 4.Consolidation: ? Who can retell the structures? Ask and answer about daily activities or after school What + /does + S + everyday/ afterschool? S + V (s- es) 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures and learn new words -Do ex A1-2(p44) in work book -Prepare U5 A4-6 Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 26: UNIT FIVE: THINGS I DO Section A: My Day Lesson : A5,6&7 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about sport actvities 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Love subjects -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: voleyball , soccer , sport ,girl ,boy 2.Grammar: -Do you play soccer? Yes, I / No, I don’t -Does Nga play soccer ? Yes, she does / No, she doesn’t III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, sub-board Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board ask and answer about everyday activites Eg: S1:What you every morning? S2: I go to school -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activities Contents I.Warm up -Ask ss some questions ?Do you often play sport? ?Which sports you play? ?When you play? II.Presentation -Have ss to look at the pictures A5 (p54) ?What are they doing? -Read and write “voleyball,, on the board & have ss to repeat -Do the same with other words -Answer the questions -Listen & copy down then repeat -Listen and copy down -Pay attention (+)New words -voleyball (n) play ~ -scoccer (AE) play ~ = football(BE) -girl (n) > < boy (n) -Show a girl student and say : She’s a girl,he’s a boy -Let’s guess “girl & boy ,, -Have ss to play game “Rub out and remember,, to learn new words -Guess -Play game to remember new words -Listen & repeat -Practice in pairs -Listen & copy down (+)Model sentences +Girls play soccer ->Do girls play soccer? Yes, they / No, they don’t +I play soccer .1.Listen and repeat Then -Look at A5 & answer practice with a partner -Read & guide ss to read A5 -Call on some pairs practice -Explain new structures +Girls play soccer ->Do girls play soccer? Yes, they / No, they don’t +I play soccer ->Do you play soccer ? Yes, I do/ No, I don’t +Nga plays soccer->Does Nga play soccer? Yes, she does /No, she doesn’t -Give form of yes/no question Do +I, You, We, They + V? Does + She,He ,It + V ? Yes, S + /does No, S + don’t /doesn’t -Ask ss to listen and answer the questions A6 about yourself Eg:Do you play sports ? Yes, I / No, I don’t III.Practice -Pay attention -Copy down ->Do you play soccer ? Yes, I do/ No, I don’t +Nga plays soccer ->Does Nga play soccer? Yes, she does /No, she doesn’t => Yes/ No question Do +I, You, We, They + V? Does + She,He ,It + V ? Yes, S + /does No, S + don’t /doesn’t -Listen and answer the questions 2.Listen and answer Say Yes,I No, I don’t Eg:Do you play sports ? Yes, I / No, I don’t 3.Remember Do you play soccer? Yes,I No,I don’t 4.Further practice -Ask ss to practice ask and answer about after school activities of people in the table Eg: Does Ba watch television? Yes, He does -Practice Ba watch T.V Lan read -Present before class -Correct -Call on some pairs practice -Correct Nam listen to music Thu read Thu & Vui play voleyball Nga play soccer Eg: Does Ba watch television? Yes, He does 4.Consolidation: ? Who can retell the structures? Ask and answer about after school activities ( Yes/ No question) Do /Does + S + V? Yes, S + Do /does No, S + / does Names of sports 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures and learn new words -Do ex A4-5-6(p45-46-47) in work book -Prepare U5 B1-4 ………………………………………………………………… Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 27: UNIT FIVE: THINGS I DO Section B: My Routine Lesson : B1, B2 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge : -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about time 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: take a shower , eat , study , lunch , dinner, go to bed 2.Grammar: -What time + /does + S + V ? S + V (s, es) + at + time III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activitie Contents I.Warm up -Ask ss some questions: -Listen and answer Eg: What you after school? -Do you play sports? -Do you the housework? -Do you watch televition? II.Pre-reading -We’ra going to tell about routine and say time of activities -Ask ss to look at the pictures B1 (p56) and ask ss: ?What is Ba doing in picture 1? -Write onthe board , read and ask ss repeat -Do the same with picture -Listen to the teacher -Look at & answer -Copy down, listen & repeat -Pay attention I.Read 1.New words - (to)take a shower - (to) go to bed - (to)eat /have breakfast ~ lunch ~ dinner -(to) start ><(to) finish - (to) go home 2.Grammar +Say the time : then explain some new words in the passage -Call on 2-3 ss read new words on the board -Play game “Rub out and remember,, to check comprehension -Practice -Play game -Giờ đúng:It’s + hour + o’clock - Giờ hơn: It’s +mins + past +hour It’s + hour + mins -Giờ kém: It’s + mins + to + hour *Note: fifteen = a quarter thirty = half Ex:I have classes from seven to a quarter past eleven III While- reading -Ask ss to listen to the passage about Ba -Guide ss to read the passage -Call on ss to practice (correct pronounciation) -Ask ss to retell about time and give give other ways -Give some hours ask ss to practice 7.00 ; 3.15 ; 4.30 ; 8.45 -Ask ss tolook at the table B2 (p57) and explain exercise: Complete time of Ba’s everyday activities -Call on ss answer before class -Correct mistakes -Listen -Listen & repeat -Practice -Revise & copy down -Listen & answer +Ask and answer about routine What time does Ba get up ? He gets up at 6.00 What time you get up? I get up at 5.30 =>What time + do/ does +S +V? S + V(s,es) + at + hour II.Complete the table -Listen & complete -Answer -Correct Time Action Ba Me get up 6.00 5.30 go to school 6.45 classes start 7.00 classes finish 11.15 have lunch 11.30 go home 5.00 go to bed 10.00 IV.Post- reading -Ask ss to read the questions 3a -Practice with a student Eg:What time does Ba get up? What time does Ba go to school? -Ask ss practice in pairs ask -Read the questions -Practice He gets up at 6.00 He goes to school at 6.45 -Work in pairs III.Practice a.Ask and answer about Ba Eg: What time does Ba [get up]? He gets up at 6.00 What time does he [go to school]? He goes to school at 6.45 and answer about Ba’s time table base on B2 -Call on some pairs practice before class -Correct -Ask ss practice 3b about yourself base on B2 -Practice before class -Correct -Work in pairs & complete the table -Practice -Tell about their friend’s routine b.About you Eg:What time you [get up]? I get up at 5.30 What time you [go to school]? I go to school at 7.00 -Call on some pairs practice -Ask ss to tell about their friend’s routine Eg:Ha gets up at5.30 She goes to school at 4.Consolidation: ? Who can retell the structures? -Ask and answer about everyday routine What time + do/ does +S +V? S + V(s,es) + at + hour -Say the time 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures and learn new words -Do ex B2(p48) in work book Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 28: UNIT FIVE: THINGS I DO Section B: My Routine Lesson : B3, B4 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about time 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard - Love subjects II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: take a shower , eat , study , lunch , dinner, go to bed 2.Grammar: -What time + /does + S + V ? S + V (s, es) + at + time III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards ,photo test 15’ Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activitie *Warm up: -Ask ss some questions: Eg: What you after school? -Do you play sports? -Do you the housework? -Do you watch televition Listen and answer 1.Action -Ask ss to read the questions 3a -Read the questions -Practice He gets up at 6.00 He goes to school at 6.45 -Work in pairs -Practice with a student Eg:What time does Ba get up? What time does Ba go to school? -Ask ss practice in pairs ask and answer about Ba’s time table base on B2 -Call on some pairs practice before class -Correct 2.Practice -Ask ss practice 3b about yourself base on B2 -Call on some pairs practice -Ask ss to tell about their friend’s routine Eg:Ha gets up at5.30 She goes to school at Listen and check Note: I, we, you, they, get up -Practice before class -Correct -Work in pairs & complete the table -Practice -Tell about their friend’s routine P1: ask P2: answer I get up at 5.30 Contents 3.Practice with a partner.Use the table a.Ask and answer about Ba Eg: What time does Ba get up? He gets up at 6.00 What time does he go to school? He goes to school at 6.45 What time does he have classes? He has classes at 7.00 What time does he have lunch? He has lunch at 11.30 What time does he go home? He goes home at 5.00 What time does he go to bed? He goes to bed at 10.00 b.About you I go to school at 6.00 What time you get up? I have classes at 6.45 I have lunch at 12.00 I go home at 5.00 I go to bed at 10.00 I, we, you, they Go He/ she goes What time you go to school? What time you have classes? What time you have lunch? What tme you go home? What time you go to bed? He/ she gets up 4.Consolidation: ? Who can retell the structures? -Ask and answer about everyday routine What time + do/ does +S +V? S + V(s,es) + at + hour -Say the time 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures and learn new words -Do ex B2(p48) in work book -Prepare U5 C1-2 …………………………………………………… Test 15’ I.Question : Write everyday routines about you and Lan Use the table Time Action Lan You get up 6.00 5.30 go to school 6.45 6.30 classes start 7.15 7.30 classes finish 11.00 11.15 have lunch 11.30 12.00 go home 5.00 4.45 go to bed 10.00 10.00 Eg: Lan gets up at six o’clock I get up at half past five II.Answer key + Mark (1 x 10 = 10 points) Eg: Lan gets up at six o’clock I get up at half past five Lan goes to school at six forty five/ a quarter to seven I go to school at six thirty/ half past six Lan has classes from seven fifteen/ a quarter past seven to eleven o’clock I have classes from half past seven/ seven thirty to eleven fifteen Lan has lunch at eleven thirty/ half past eleven I have lunch at twelve o’clock Lan goes home at five o’clock I go home at a quarter past four Lan goes to bed at ten o’clock 10.I go to bed at ten o’clock ………………………………………………………………… Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 29: UNIT FIVE: THINGS I DO Section C: Classes Lesson : C1 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledges: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and anwer about time table 2.Skills.-Pratice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: math, literature, history,geography, days of the week 2.Grammar: -What we have today? ? We have math -To have / has III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, real objects, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss answer the questions: Eg: What time you get up? What time you go to school? What time classes start/ finish? What time you go to bed? -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activitie Contents I.Warm up -Show the clock and ask ss -Look at the clock ?What time is it? and answer the 8.00 ; 7.45 ; 9.30 ; 11.00; 12.15 questions -Control and correct II.Presentation -Ask ss to look at the timetable and ask ss ?What is this? -Write “timetable,, on the board and giude ss to read -Show the math book, literature book, history book, geography book to introduce new words -Write on the board & ask ss to -Look at the timetable & answer -It’s a timetable -Copydown & repeat -Look at and listen -Copy down listen & repeat 1.Listen and repeat a.New words -math (n) -literature (n) -history (n) -geography (n) b.Grammar +To have / has +N Ex: I have a book She has a pen practice -Call on ss to practice -Read the dialogue twice -Guide ss to read -Explain grammar: *To have / has +N Ex: I have a book She has a pen +Don’t/ doesn’t have Ex: We don’t have math today Nam doesn’t have math today +What we have today? We have math -Call on ss to practice the dialogue in pairs -Ask ss to read time start and finish each class -Ask ss to practice in pairs ask & answer about timetable Ex: What we have today? We have math What time does it start? It starts at 7.50 What time does it finish? It finishes at 8.35 -Call on some pairs present -Correct -Ask ss to look at C2 (p59)and introduce These are days of the week Now who can tell me what the fist day osf the week is -Introduce days of the week and write on the board -Guide ss to read days -Call on ss to practice -Ask ss to matching days with their meanings -Correct -Read aloud -Listen -Listen & repeat -Listenand copy down -Practice in pairs -Say time +What we have today? We have math c.Practice S1:What we have today? S2:We have math S1: What time does it start? S2: It starts at 7.50 S1:What time does it finish? S2:It finishes at 8.35 -Work inpairs -Present in pairs -Correct -Look at & listen -Listen & answer -Listen & copy down -Listen & repeat -Read aloud -Play game 2.Listen and repeat -Monday -Tuesday -Wesnesday -Thursday -Friday -Saturday -Sunday *Matching A with B A B -Monday Thứ năm -Tuesday Thứ bảy -Wesnesday Thứ hai -Thursday Chủ nhật -Friday Thứ tư -Saturday Thứ ba -Sunday Thứ sáu -Correct III.Practice -Ask ss to complete the dialogue in groups +Don’t/ doesn’t have Ex: We don’t have math today Nam doesn’t have math today 3.Further practice -Work in groups Complete the dialogue What we(1) today? -Call on ss to go to the board and stick their answers -Ask ss correct mistakes -correct and give answer -Go to the board & stick the answer -Correct andcopy down We(2) geographt What timedoes it start? It(3) .at 10.15 Do we have math? No, we(4) Answer key 1.have ; 2.have ; 3.starts ; 4.don’t 4.Consolidation: ? Who can retell the structures? -What we have today? ? We have math -To have / has -Days of the week, school subjects 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures and learn new words -Do ex C1-2(p50- 51) in work book -Prepare U5 C3-4 + Gp1 Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 30: UNIT FIVE: THINGS I DO Section C: Classes Lesson : C2,C3 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to ask and answer about school time table Revise present simple tense 2.Skills: -Pratice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: Revise (school subjects and days of the week) 2.Grammar: -When we have history ? We have it on Tuesday and Friday -Does Lan have math on Friday? No, she doesn’t -Present simple tense III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, real objects, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson -Ss answer the questions: Eg: What you have today? What time does it start / finish? Do you have geography today? -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activitie I.Warm up -Control ss to play game “Slap the board,, with days of the week -Correct -Play game in groups Contents Monday Wednesday Thursda y Sunday Friday Saturday Tuesday -Listen to the teacher -Listen & repeat -Listen& copy down 1.Listen and repeat +When we have history? We have it on Tuesday &Thursday +Does Lan have math on Friday? No, she doesn’t *Note: on + days of the week 2.Practice History English Thu Math Literature Wed English Literature Biolog y Music Tue Math English Mon History Art -Present beforeclass Geograph y Math -Correct -Look at the time table and practice in pairs History -Work in pairs Geograph y II.Action 1: Listen and repeat -Now, you will read the conversation between Nga and Ba they ask andanswer about school timetable -Read conversation and guide ss to read -Explain new stuctures +When we have history? We have it on Tuesday &Thursday +Doea Lan have math on Friday? No, she doesn’t *Note: on + days of the week -Ask ss to practice the conversation in pairs -Correct pronounciation -Hang on the board a timetable and ask ss to practice in pairs Eg: When we have[ English]? We have it on[Monday,Tuesday and Thursday Do we have[ Music]? No, we don’t Fri Math Biolog y Physic History -Call on some pairs practice -Correct mistakes Sat Art Physic Biolog y Eg: When we have[ English]? We have it on[Monday,Tuesday and Thursday Do we have[ Music]? No, we don’t 4.Consolidation: ? Who can retell the structures? -When we have history? We have it on Tuesday - Present simple tense -Days of the week, school subjects 5.Home work: -Drill stuctures and learn new words -Do ex C3-4(p51- 52) in work book …………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 31: Preparetion date: period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 21/10/2012 date: 24/10/2012 date: 24/10/2012 date: 24/10/2012 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: GRAMMAR PRACTICE I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to revise asking and answer about time, adjectives with “be,, and question words 2.Skills: -Pratice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: Revise 2.Grammar: -Time : What time is it? It’s -Question words: What, where ,How -Adjectives : Big , small III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, real objects, sub-board Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson -Ss go to the board practice in pairs ExC3(P51) in workbook: Eg: When you have math / geography / literature? Do you have English on Tuesday? -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activitie Contents Warm up: -How are you today? -Answer the questions -Who’s absent today? -What we have today? -What time you go to school? -Listen and retell I Revision II.Revision 1.Say the time : -Copy down What time is it? 1.Telling about time -Giờ đúng: -Ask ss to revise the It’s + hour + o’clock question and answer about -Giờ hơn: time It’s +mins + past +hour -Correct and give form It’s + hour + mins -Giờ kém: It’s + mins + to + hour *Note: fifteen = a quarter thirty = half -Listen & revise Ex:I have classes from seven to a quarter past -Copy down eleven 2.Adjectivies with “tobe,, Eg: Is she small? 2.Adjectivies with tobe Yes, she is /No, she isn’t -Help ss to revise -Listen & revise Is your classroom big? adjectivies with tobe in Yes, it is / No , it isn’t yes/no question Is/Are + S +adj? -Give form Yes,S + is /are ; No,S +isn’t/ aren’t 3.Question words 3.Question words What , Where Which , -Ask ss to retell question Who , How words they’ve learned Eg: What’s your name? -Correct Where you live? III.Exercises II.Exercises Ex1: Present simple tense -Ask ss to look at the clock -Practice in pairs (p60) and say the time Ex: S1:What time is it? S2:It’s [seven o’clock.] -Call on ss to practice in pairs (change role) -Correct -Ask ss to answer the question Gp3 (p61) in pairs about their school and house Ex: S1: Is your [house] big? S2: Yes, it is / No it isn’t -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Ask ss to read the questions in Gp4 (61) and complete -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Present before class -Wor in pairs a.get up Get-get; get-gets; get-get b.have do-have-have; does-havehave; does-have-has c.go do-go-go; does-go-goes; do-go-go d.wash do-wash-wash does-wash-washes -Practice -Read silently and complete -practice -Correct Look at the book -Read -Ask ss to look at Gp5 (p61) -Work in pairs -Read the questions a – e -Ask ss to answer the -Copy down questions about their school time table -Listen and -Correct and ask ss to write -Work in pairs down their notebooks -Practice -Copy down -Listen and ex Ex2: What time is it? a.It’s seven o’clock b.It’s a quarter past nine c.It’s half past four d.It’s twelve o’clock e.It’s a quarter to two f It’s ten to nine Ex3: Is your house big? Yes, it is /No, it isn’t Is your school big? Yes, it is /No, it isn’t Ex4: Question words a Where b How c What d How e Which f Which Ex5: Classes a.We have literature on b.We have math on c.We have geography on d.We have on Friday e.We have on Monday -Have ss to ex6 a-h -Ask ss to practice in pairs Ex6 Present simple tense a.I get up at b.I go to school at -Call on some pairs practice -Correct and have ss to copy down -Work in pairs -Copydown -Do ex c.They start at d.They end at e.I have lunch at f.Yes, I do/ No, I don’t h.I go to bed at Ex7 Present simple tense -Guide ss to ex7 -Answer complete the dialogues -Copy down -Call on some pairs practice -Coreect a.gets c.brushes e.goes b takes d has -Give more ex on the board and ask ss to practice -Call on ss answer -Correct 4.Consolidation: -Present simple tense -Classes, timetable 5.Home work: -Do ex again -Prepare Unit (A1-3) Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 32: Preparetion date period: Class: period: Class: period: Class: 21/10/2012 date: date: date: total : 25 total : 24 total : 26 out: out: out: UNIT SIX: PLACES Section A: Our House Lesson : A1-2 ********* I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to give personal details and describe place 2.Skills: -Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: yard, lake, rever, hotel, park, tree, flower, rice paddy, beautiful 2.Grammar: -Our house has a big yard -We live in a house near a lake -There is a hotel near the lake -There are trees and flowers in the park III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson -Ss answer the questions: Eg: What time youget up? Whattime youhave breakfast? What time you go to school? What time you have classes? -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activitie I.Warm up -Where you live? -Is your house big or small? -Answer the -What are there near your questions house? Contents II.Presentation -Ask ss to look at the picture A1(p62) and introduce: This is Thuy’s house ?What are there near Thuy’s house? -Introduce new words by picture -Modal and write them onthe board -Guide ss to read -Call on ss to read aloud -Check vocabulary by play game “Rub out and remember,, -We’ll listen to the passage about Thuy’s house.Let’s listen and read -Call on ss to read aloud the text -Introduce new structures -Ask ss to make sentences -Guide ss to answer the questions -Call on ss to practice -Correct -Look at and listen -Answer -Look at and listen -Listen and copy down -Listen and repeat -Practice -Play game -Listen -Read a loud -Listen and copydown -Make sentences -Answer the questions -Work in pairs -Correct 1.New words -yard (n) -lake (n) -river (n) -hotel (n) -park (n) -tree (n) -flower (n) -rice paddy (n) beautiful (adj) 2.New structure -Our house has a big yard -We live in a house near a lake There is a hotel near the lake There are trees and flowers in the park 3.Answer a.She is twelve years old b.She’s a teacher c.Her brother’s name is Minh d.He’s twenty e.Thuy lives in a house f.There is a river, a hotel, a park and a rice paddy near the house III.Practice -Use the pictures p.62 A1to practice A2 Ex: What is that? It’s a rice paddy What are those? Thet are trees -Let ss practice in pairs -Call on some pairs practice -Correct 4.Consolidation: 5.Home work: -Practice in pairs 4.Practice Ask and answer questions: Eg: What is that? It’s a rice paddy What are those? There are trees -Present before class -Correct ?What are there near Thuy’shouse -Learn voc and new stuctures and read A1 again -Do ex1-2p 60-61 in work book -PrepareUnit (A4-7) Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 33: Preparetion date period: Class: period: Class: period: Class: 21/10/2012 date: /10/2012 date: /10/2012 date: /10/2012 total : 25 total : 24 total : 26 out: out: out: UNIT SIX: PLACES Section A: Our House Lesson : A3,4,5,6 ********* I.Objectives: Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to further practice describing place 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard -Love subjects II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: town , village 2.Grammar: (Review)-Our house has a big yard -There is a hotel near the lake -There are trees and flowers in the park III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson -Ss go to theboard practice ExA1 p60 in pairs (in work book) -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activitie Contents I.Warm up -Giude ss toplaygame “Jumble -Play game 1.aydr = yard words,, 2.ekla = lake -Control and correct 3.tehlo = hotel 4.krap = park rveri = river 6.rceipydad = rice paddy II.Presentation (+)Modal sentences -Help ss to revise structures in -Listen and revise We live in a house last period Our house has a yard We live in a house There is a hotel near my Our house has a yard house There is a hotel near my house There are trees in the park There are trees in the park City Country -Ask ss to write the list of -hotel -river things you see in the city and -Practice in groups -park -rice paddy country and write list -lake -Make sentences -Ask ss to make sentences base on the stucture :There are/ is Eg:There is a board in the classroom III.Practice Ask ss to write A3 using the pictures -Call on some ss to read their writings -Correct -Ask ss to read words in the table (A4p64) -Explain new words -Ask ss to listen and write the words you hear in your exercise book -Read the text twice -Call on ss answer -Correct -Read again and have ss to -Drill writing -Read aloud -Correct 3.Write.Comple the sentences Our house has a yard It is near a rice paddy.There is a hotel near the lake There is a river and a park There are trees and flower in the park -Listen and repeat -Copr down -Listen and prepare -Listen and -Answer -Correct 4.Listen Write the words you hear -town > < village a.hotel b.country c.rice paddy , river check the answer -Have ss to look at the pictures A5p64 and answer ?What is that? -Guide ss to write about your place base on pictures Eg:There is a hotel near our house -Call on ss to read aloud their writings -Correct and give answer *Other activities Chain Games S1:There’s a hotel near our house S2:There’s a hotel and a school near … S3:There’s a hotel, a school, and a … -Listen and check 5.Write sentences about your place -Look at and answer Eg:There is a hotel near our house b)There are trees near our -Pay attention house c)There is a river near our -Practice house d)There is a lake near our -Read aloud house e)There is a school near our -Correct house f)There is a rice paddy near our house -Play game *Other activities Chain Games S1:There’s a hotel near our house S2:There’s a hotel and a school near … S3:There’s a hotel, a school, and a … 4.Consolidation: -Retell vocabulary and structures 5.Home work: -Write 4-5 sentences about your place -Do ex3p 62 in work book -PrepareUnit (B 1-5) Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 34: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period :3 Class: 6C 28/10/2012 date: 31/10/2012 date: 31/10/2012 date: 31/10/2012 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT SIX: PLACES Section B: In the city Lesson : B1,2,3,4 ********* I.Objectives: Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to describe where Minh lives and use town vocabulary and prepositions of places 2.Skills:- Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard -Love subjects II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: store, restaurant, bookstore, temple, hospital, factory, museum 2.Grammar: -Their house is next to a store -Where does he work? He works in the factory -Where does he live? He lives in the city III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson (No check) 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activitie Contents I.Warm up -Ask ss some questions ?Where you live? ?Is your house big or small? ?What are there near your house? II.Pre-reading -Ask ss to look at the pictures B1 p65-66 and ask ?What you see on this street? -Explain new words and write on the board -Have ss to repeat words -Call on ss to read new words aloud -Have ss to play game “Slap the board,, with words they’ve learned -Ask ss to predict what are there near Minh house III.While-reading -Listen and answer +in the city/country +It’s big/small +there are -Look at and answer -Listen and copy down -Listen and repeat -Read aloud -Play game I.Listen and read 1.New words -store(n) -restaurant(n) - bookstore(n) -temple(n) - hospital(n) - factory(n) - museum (n) -stadium (n) -neighborhood (n) -next to (pre) -Predict Eg:there is a store, a temple, a restaurant 2.New structures Their house is next to a -Read B1 and guide ss to read -Listen and repeat store -Ask ss to compare with their -Compare with their Minh’s father works in the prediction before prediction factory -Call on ss to read the text aloud -Practice reading >Where does Minh’s -Explain structures in the text -Listen and copy father work? down Minh lives in the city -Ask ss to read the text again and -Read silentty and >Where does Minh live? answer true or flase exercise 3.Answer true or false a.F (in the city) b.T c.F ( a store) d.T e.F (in a hospital) f.F (in a factory) IV.Post-reading -Ask ss to read a-e silently -Have ss to read B1 again and complete the sentences -Read silently -Read B1 and complete the sentences -Call on ss answer -Answer -Correct and give correct answer -Correct and copy -Ask ss to read the words in the down table B3 p67 -Read the words in -Now, you’ll listen and write the the table words you hear in your exercise -Listen and prepare book -Read the sentences twice -Listen and write -Call on ss answer the words they hear -Read again to check the answer -Answer -Give correct answer -Listen and check -Have ss to read B4 -Copy down -Practice II.Complete the sentences a.Minh and his family live in the city b.On the street, there is a restaurant, a bookstore,and a temple c.His mother works in a hospital d.Minh’s house is next to a store e.His father works in a factory III.Listen a)musuem b)bookstore c)river d)street 4.Consolidation: -Retell vocabulary and structures 5.Home work: -Read the text again -Do exB1-2 p62-63 in work book …………………………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 35: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 28/10/2012 date: 1/11/2012 date: 1/11/2012 date: 1/11/2012 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT SIX: PLACES Section C: Around the house Lesson : C1-2 ********* I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to use preposition of place to describe around the house 2.Skills:-Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard -Love subjects II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: Preposition of place ( in front of, behind, to the left/ right ) Mountain, well 2.Grammar: -Where is the yard? It’sin front of the house -Where are the tall trees?They are to the right of the house III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Proceduer: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson -Ss go to the board ex B1 p62 in work book -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities Sts’ activitie Contents I.Warm up Jumble words -Close their books go dasimut = stadium -Ticks these jumbled words to the board and write tiyc = city on the board words tplshiao = hospital useoh = house -Guides Ss to -Correct eaarrusntt = restaurant -Checks and corrects farotyc = factory II.Presentation -Ask ss to look at the picture of the house C1 p68 and describe position of things around the house +Show the well and ask ?What is that? (a Well) ?Where is the well? (To the left of the house) -Write new words on the board -Ask ss to practice new words -Read and guide ss to read C1 -Call on ss to read the text -Explain the new structre +Make question for the answer -Look at the picture and describe -Look at and answer -Copy down -Practice -Listen and repeat -Read aloud -Listen and copy down 1.New words -mountain (n) -well (n) -in front of > < behind -to the right > < to the left 2.New structures Where is the yard? It’sin front of the house -Where are the tall trees? They are to the right of the house =>Ask & answer about place +Where is/ are + N? N+ is/are + preposition of place 3.Answer a.The yard is in front of the house b.The tall trees are behind the To the lelf of the house, there is a well >Where is the well? -Introduce the question +Where is/ are + N? N + is/are + preposition of place -Ask ss to read the text again and answer the questions a- f -Read silently and answer the questions -Practice in pairs -Correct house c.The mountains are behind the tall trees d.The well is to the lelf of the house e.The flowers are to the right of the house f.the house is infront of the tall trees -Call on ss to practice in pairs -Correct III.Practice -Ask ss to look at the houses in C2 p69 and describe the different between house -Now listen and find the right pictures -Read the listening twice -Call on ss answer ?Which is Ba’s house? ?Which is Lan’s house? ?Which is Tuan’s house? -Read the listening again to check the answer -Give correct answer -Ask ss to practice in pairs ask and answer about the house C2 Eg: Where is [the yard]? It’s in front of the house -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Look at and describe 4.Listen and find the write picture -Listen and prepare -Listen and a.A -Answer Eg: Where is the yard? It’s in front of the house = There is a yard in front of the house -Listen and check b A c B d B -Copy down -Work in pairs -Practice -Correct 4.Consolidation: -Retell vocabulary and structures 5.Home work: -Describe Ba, Lan and Tuan houses -Do exC1 p63-64 in work book …………………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 28/10/2012 date: 2/11/2012 date: 2/11/2012 date: 2/11/2012 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: Period 36: UNIT SIX: PLACES Section C: Around the house Lesson : C3,4,5 ********* I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to use preposition of place 2.Skills:- Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard -Love subjects II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: Preposition of place ( between, opposite ) Photocopy store, bakery, movie theater, drugstore 2.Grammar: -Where is /are the .? It’s opposite the III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the old lesson -Ss go to the board describe Ba’s house, Lan’s house and Tuan’s house -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activities I.Warm up Sts’ activitie Contents store -Ask ss to play game “Net works,, about town and country stadium rice paddy -Play game in group Town Countr y -Control and correct restaurant II.Presentation -Ask ss to look at the picture C3 p70 and ask ?Where is it? -Show the picture and ask ‘What is that?, to introduce new words -Have ss to practice new words -Play game “Rub out and remember,, to check village -Look at and answer 1.New words -bakery (n) -photocopy store (n) -Listen and copy -movie theater (n) down -drug store (n) -police station (n) -Practice -toy store (n) -opposite (pre) -Play game -between (pre) 2.Modal sentences vocabulary -Read and guide ss to read C3 -Listen and repeat -Call on some ss to read -Read aloud aloud -Listen and revise -Help ss to revise the structure ask and answer about place III.Practice Where is the movie theater? It’s between bakery and the drugstore It’s opposite the police station -Ask ss to practice ask and answer about preposition of stores in pictire C3 Eg: Where is the movie theater? It’s opposite the police station -Ask ss to practice in pairs -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Guide ss to play guessing game: a student look at the picture C3and describe a place other has to guess Eg:It’s opposite the movie theater.What is it? It’s the police station Yes.That’s right -Ask ss to practice in pairs -Call on some pairs practice (5 pairs) -Correct *Further practice -Ask and answer questions about your house (C5p71) -Call on some pairs practice -Correct 3.Practice Ex1:Ask and answer questions about the picture in exercise C3 Eg: Where is the movie theater? It’s opposite the police station Where is the police station? It’s between the movie theater and the photocopy store -Listen and practice -Work in pairs -Practice -Correct -Play guessing game in pairs -Practice -Practice -Correct -Work in pairs Ex2:Play guessing game Eg:It’s opposite the movie theater.What is it? It’s the police station Yes.That’s right 1.It’s a toy store 2.It’s the movie theater 3.It’s the photocopy store/ movie theater 4.It’s the photocopy store 5.It’s the bakery/ the drug store *Further practice Eg:There is a yard in front of my house 4.Consolidation: -Retell vocabulary and structures 5.Home work: -Describe around your house ……………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 28/10/2012 date: /11/2012 date: /11/2012 date: /11/2012 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: Period 37: TEST OF ENGLISH No Time45’ I.Objectives: -By the end of the lesson ss willbe able to drill skills +Listening comprehension the passage about you +Reading comprehension about Thuy’s +Language focus: Choose the correct answer anh complete the dialogue +Writing: write answers the question II.Teaching aids: T: Photo tests Ss: pens, ruler III.Procedure: 1.Matrix Chủ đề Nhận biết I/Language Thông hiểu TN Choose the best answer Vận dụng Cộng Cấp độ Cấp độ thấp cao TL TN TL TN II/ Writing Số câu :8 Số điểm: Tỉ lệ :20% III/Reading Read the passag e and answer the questi ons 4 Số câu: Số điểm :4.0 Tỉ lệ :40% Tổng số câu : 20 Tổng số Tổng số câu: Tổng số TL TN Match the answer s to the questio ns Comple te the passage Tổng số câu: Tổng số Tổng số câu: 12 Tổng số Tổng số câu: 20 Tổng số điểm:10 Tỉ lệ :100% TL Số câu :8 Số điểm: Tỉ lệ :20% Số câu: Số điểm : 4.0 Tỉ lệ :40% điểm:1 Tỉ lệ : 100% điểm:2 Tỉ lệ : 20% điểm:4 Tỉ lệ : 40% điểm:4 Tỉ lệ : 40% 2.Questions: Test 1: I Listen and fill the gaps (2 points) Hello My name (1) … Lan I'm twelve years old I'm a student I (2) … a brother, Tuan He's (3) ……… engineer He's twenty- seven We live in a house and a lake Our house has a yard Our house is (4)……… big It's small II Choose the best answer … is that? - That is a lamp A Who B What C How Our house … a yard A have B is C has Minh … up at six o'clock every day A get B gets C getes What time … Nga go to school? A does B C is 9.What are……………….? They are flowers A.this B.that C.these D.there 10.There is a well in front……………….the house A.from B.to C.of D.on 11.We live…………….a house A.in B.on C.at D.from 12……………is that? It is a rice paddy A.What B.Where C.Who D.Which III Read the passage and answer the questions Nam is twelve years old He is in grade He lives with his mother, father and two sisters in the city His house is next to a store On the street, there is a restaurant, a bookstore and a police station In the neighborhood, there is a hospital and a factory Nam's father works in the factory His mother works in the hospital * Questions: 13 Where does Nam live? 14 Does he live with his mother, his father and two sisters? 15 What is there on the street? 16 Where does his father work? IV Match the answers to the questions Questions Answers 17 How are you? 18 Where you live? 19 How many students are there in your class? 20 What does your mother do? a We live on Tran Phu street b She is a nurse c There are 30 d Fine, thank you 17 18 19 V.Answer the questions 21 What time you get up? …………………………………………………………… 22 What time you go to school? …………………………………………………………… 23 Do you help your mom? …………………………………………………………… 24 When you have Math? …………………………………………………………… 20 Test 2: I Listen and fill the gaps (2 points) Hello My name (1) … Lan I'm twelve years old I'm a student I (2) … a brother, Tuan He's (3) ……… engineer He's twenty- seven We live in a house and a lake Our house has a yard Our house is (4)……… big It's small I.Choose the best answer 1.What are……………….? They are flowers A.this B.that C.these D.there 2.There is a well in front……………….the house A.from B.to C.of D.on 3.We live…………….a house A.in B.on C.at D.from 4……………is that? It is a rice paddy A.What B.Where C.Who D.Which My brother and I … students A am B is C are That is my father … is thirty- nine years old A He B She C It This is his sister … name is Hoa A My B Her C His We are … the yard A in B on C to II Read the passage and answer the questions Nam is twelve years old He is in grade He lives with his mother, father and two sisters in the city His house is next to a store On the street, there is a restaurant, a bookstore and a police station In the neighborhood, there is a hospital and a factory Nam's father works in the factory His mother works in the hospital * Questions: 17 Where does her mother work? 18 Does he live with his mother, his father and two sisters? 19 What is there on the street? 20 Where does his father work? IV Match the questions to the answers Questions 13 Who's this? 14 Is your house big? 15 Which grade are you in? 16 What time does Lan go to school? Answers a I'm in grade b She goes to school at 6.00 c It's Lan d Yes, it is 15 16 17 V.Answer the questions 21 What time you have lunch? …………………………………………………………… 22 What time you go to bed? …………………………………………………………… 23 Do you go to the store? …………………………………………………………… 24 When you have Geography? …………………………………………………………… 18 Test 3: I Choose the best answer My brother and I … students A am B is C are That is my father … is thirty- nine years old A He B She C It This is his sister … name is Hoa A My B Her C His We are … the yard A in B on C to II Complete the passage Hello My name (5) … Lan I'm twelve (6) … old I'm a student I (7) … a brother, Tuan He's (8) … .engineer He's twenty- seven We live (9) … a house (10) … a lake Our house (11) … a yard Our house is (12) … big It's small III Match the answers to the questions Questions Answers 13 Who's this? a I'm in grade 14 Is your house big? b She goes to school at 6.00 15 Which grade are you in? c It's Lan 16 What time does Lan go to d Yes, it is school? 13 14 15 16 IV Read the passage and answer the questions Nam is twelve years old He is in grade He lives with his mother, father and two sisters in the city His house is next to a store On the street, there is a restaurant, a bookstore and a police station In the neighborhood, there is a hospital and a factory Nam's father works in the factory His mother works in the hospital * Questions: 17 Where does her mother work? 18 Does he live with his mother, his father and two sisters? 19 What is there on the street? 20 Where does his father work? Keys: I.Choose the best answer 1-B 2- C 3–B 4- A II Read the passage and answer the questions * Questions: He lives in the city Yes, he does On the street, there is a restaurant, a bookstore and a police station His father works in the factory III Match the answers to the questions 9–D 10 – A 11 – C 12 - B IV Complete the passage 13- is 14- year 15- am 16 – an 17 – in 18- and 19- has 20- a ……………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B /11/2012 date: /11/2012 date: /11/2012 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: Teaching date Period 38: period: Class: 6C date: /11/2012 total : 26 out: UNIT SEVEN: YOUR HOUSE Section A: Is your house big? Lesson : A1-2 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about things around the house 2.Skills:-Practice skills.3 3.Attitude: Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: Revise words in Unit 2.Grammar: -There is ./Is there a ? -There are / Are there any ? III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson ( no check) 3.New lesson Teacher’s activites Sts’ activites Contents I.Warm up -Ask ss to look at the house in -Look at and answer U6 C1 p68 and answer the questions ?where is the yard? ?Where is the well? ?Where are the trees? ?Where are the flowers? II.Presentation 1.Listen Then practice + Is there a yard? -Ask ss to look at the picture -Look at and answer Yes, there is in A1 p72 then answer about +Is there a well? the house No, there isn’t ?Is the house big or small? S1: small +Are there any flowers? ?Is there a yard? S2: yes Yes, there are ?Is there a well? S3:no +Are there any trees? ?Are there any trees? No, there aren’t ?Are there any flowers? -Have ss to listen to -Listen and compare =>Is there a / an ? conversation and compare Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t with their prediction +Are there any ? -Explain the stuctures: -Listen and copy Yes, there are/ No, there Is there a/ an ? down aren’t Are there any ? -Ask ss to practice conversation -Call on some pairs practice -Work in pairs -Present before class -Practice -Now work with a partner Ask questions about your house.(Give information about house :big or small/ beautiful/ yard/ trees/ flowers/ well ) Eg:Is your house big? Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t Is there a yard? Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t -Practice -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Correct mistakes III.Practice *Practice Eg:Is your house big? Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t Is there a yard? Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t -Ask ss to look at the pictures -Look at and listen A2 p73 and give new words Then copy down -Ask ss to practice the letter -read the letter 2.Practice with a partner Key a-D , b-A, c-E ,d-B ,e-C Ex:Is there a flower garden in -Work in pairs front of the house? Yes,there is -Write down -Correct a) Is there a flower garden in front of the house? D.Yes,there is b)Is the house beautiful? A.yes,it is c)Is there a flower garden behind the house? E.No,there isn’t d)Is the lake to the right of the house? B.No,it isn’t e)Is nga in the city? C.No,she isn’t *Other activites Hoa’s house is small It’s old There is a yard in front of the house There aren’t any trees -Practice -Work in pairs *Other activites -Ask ss to write a short paragaph to discribe Hoa’s house base on information A1 -Read the writing -Call on ss answer and correct 4.Consolidation: -Is there a / an ? Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t -Are there any ? Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t 5.Home work: -Write a short paragraph to describe around your house -Do exA 1,2, 3, p66-67 in work book -Prepare U7 A3-6 Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 39: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C /11/2012 date: /11/2012 date: /11/2012 date: /11/2012 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT SEVEN: YOUR HOUSE Section A: Is your house big? Lesson : A3-6 ********* I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to be practice describing around the house 2.Skills: -Practice skills 3.Attitude: Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: Revise words in Unit 2.Grammar: -Is there a ? Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t -Are there any ? Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson -Ss go to the board and practice ex A3 p66 in work book -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activites Sts’ activites Contents I.Warm up *Matching -Control ss to play game -Play game 1.house a hoa ‘Matching, with the words in yard b cò last priod 3.old c nhµ -Correct 4.flower d c©y 5.tree e s©n II.Presentation 1Revise grammar -Write questions and -Look at and copy answer in A1 p72 on the down +Is the house big ?No, it isn’t board +Is it old? Yes ,it is ?Is the house big ?No, it isn’t =>Hái ®o¸n tÝnh chÊt cña ?Is it old? Yes ,it is -Ask some ss ?Is your house small? ?Is it old? -Have ss to make questions base on stuctures (pen/ newschool bag/ old) -Explain meaning of the stuctures -Help ss to revise the stuctures Is there a/ an ? Are there any ? -Give some cued words and ask ss to practice (yard/ trees/ hotel ) -Call on some pairs practice -Correct mistakes III.Practice S1: yes S2:no -Practice in pairs -Listen and copy down -Work in pairs mét vËt + Is there a yard? Yes, there is No, there isn’t +Are there any flowers? Yes, there are No, there aren’t =>Is there a / an ? Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t +Are there any ? Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t -Present before class -Practice Look at and listen -Ask ss to look at the pictures Then copy down A3a p74 and give new words -Work in pairs -Ask ss to practice in pairs Ex:What is that? It’s a hotel What are those? They are stores -Present before -Call on ss practice class -Practice -Ask ss to practice in pairs 3b Ex:Is there a lake near your house? Yes, there is Are there any trees near your house ? No, there aren’t -Work in pairs -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Correct -Look at and listen -Ask ss to look at the pictures A4 p74 and choose one of the houses but don’t tell your partner which house Ask questions to find which house your partner chooses -Work in pairs Ex: Are there any trees? Are they behind the house? 2.Practice with a partner a) -bank (n) -supermarket(n) -post office (n) Ex:What is that? It’s a hotel What are those? They are stores b) Ex:Is there a lake near your house? Yes, there is Are there any trees near your house ? No, there aren’t 3.Work in pair.Choose one of the houses Ex: Are there any trees? Yes, there are Are they behind the house? Yes, there are Is there a lake? No, there isn’t =>House B Is there a lake? Is it in front of the house? -Ask ss to practice in pairs -Call on ss practice -Present before class 4.Listen Which house is it? House C -Ask ss to look at houses in A4 carefully.Then listen to the description and answer ?Which house is it? -Read the text twice -Call on ss answer -Read again to check the answer -Correct -Ask ss to read A6 -Look at and listen -Listen to the text -Answer -Listen and check the answer -Copy down -Read aloud *Other activites -Ask ss to write a short paragaph to discribe a house -Write in A4 -Call on ss answer and correct -Read the writing 5.Play with words We have a house And a yard There are trees and flowers In our yard We spend hours Among the trees and the flowers In our beautiful yard *Other activites It is small house It’s old There is a yard in front of the house There aren’t any trees 4.Consolidation: -Is there a / an ? Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t -Are there any ? Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t 5.Home work: -Do exA 5,6 p67 in work book -Prepare U7 B1-2 _ Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 40: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 28/10/2012 date: 2/11/2012 date: 2/11/2012 date: 2/11/2012 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT SEVEN: YOUR HOUSE Section B: Town or country? Lesson 3: B1,2,3 ********** I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read a text to understand the differences between town and country 2.Skills:- Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: noisy , quiet , zoo, apartment ,paddy fields ,market 2.Grammar: Yes/ No question -Does Ba live in town? Yes, he does/ No, he doesn’t -Is it noisy? Yes, it is / No, it isn’t -Are there any stores? Yes, there are / No, there aren’t III.Teaching aids: T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.Procedure: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson -Ss go to the board and describe one of the houses ex A6 p67 in work book -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher’s activites Sts’ activites Contents I.Warm up -Aks some questions -Answer the ?Where you live? questions ?Do you live in town or country? ?What are there near your house? II.Presentation -Ask ss to look at two pictures B1 p76-77 then answer the questions ?Where is it in the 1st and 2nd picture? -Tell me the difference between country and town -Write ‘noisy, quiet, on the board and ask ss to repeat -Ask ss to look at Chi’s house and Ba’s house and decribe things near their houses -Write new words on the board and have ss to repeat -Ask ss to practice new words - Checks vocabulary by using R.O & R -Read and guide ss to read the text twice -Look at and answer 1.New words -town > < country -noisy > < quiet - aparterment (n) -clinic (n) -Tell -market (n) -zoo (n) -Copy down , listen -paddy field (n) and repeat 2.Grammar -Look at and Yes/ No questions describe -Does Ba live in town? -Listen and copy Yes, he does/ No, he doesn’t down then repeat -Is it noisy? -Practice Yes, it is / No, it isn’t -Write words again -Are there any stores? Yes, there are -Listen and repeat No, there aren’t -Call on ss to read aloud -Ask ss to summarize about Ba’s house and Chi’s house -Revise Yes/ No questions -Ask ss to answer the questions -Call on some pairs practice -Correct 3.Practice -Ask ss to read the passage about Ba (B2 p77)Then write sentences about Chi’s house -Call on ss read their writing -Correct -Read aloud -Practice -Listen and copy down -Work in pairs -Present before class -Correct 3.Answer the questions a.yes, he does b.No, he doesn’t c.yes, it is d.No, she doesn’t e.No, there aren’t f yes, it is 4.Write sentences about Chi’s house -Read and write -Read the writing -Correct Chi lives in a house in the country Near her house there aren’t any stores There are trees , flowers ,a river, a lake It’s very quiet 5.Listen and check -Ask ss to look at the table B3.Listen and check (v) the words you hear and (x) the words you don’t hear -Read the tape twice -Call on ss answer -Read again to check the answer -Ask ss to practice about Minh, Nga, Tuan Eg:Does Minh live in th city? Yes, he does Does he live in a house? No, he doesn’t He lives in an apartment -Call on some pairs practice -Correct Look at and listen Minh : City – an apartment Tuan: Town – house Nga: City – house -Listen and check -Answer -Listen andcheck the answer Eg:Does Minh live in th city? Yes, he does Does he live in a house? No, he doesn’t He lives in an apartment -Work in pairs -Work in groups -Present before class *Other activites In town In the country …it’s noisy …it’s quiet we live in we live in aparment a house there are *Other activites -Ask ss to list the difference between country and town paddy field …there’s a zoo there are shops etc …etc -Call on ss answer and correct 4.Consolidation: -Yes/ No questions -Town and country 5.Home work: -Do exB 1,2-3 p68-69 in work book -Prepare U7 B3 –C1-2,3 _ Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 42: UNIT SEVEN: YOUR HOUSE Section C: On the move Lesson4 : C1,2,3 ********* I.OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to -Skills:-Practice skills -Attitude: Sts ask and answer about transportations II.LANGUAGE CONTENTS: -Vocabulary: bike, motobike, plan, train, travel -Grammar: -How you go/ travel ? I go/ travel by + means -How does he/ she go/ travel ? She/ he goes/ travels by + means -Technique: Work in pairs, question & answer III.TEACHING AIDS: T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.PROCEDURE 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson -Ss go to the board read and answer about Ba’s house and Chi’s house -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson TEACHER’S ACTIVITES I.Warm up -Aks some questions ?Do you live in a house? ?Do you live in town or country? ?Are there any stores near your house? II.Presentation -Ask ss to look at the pictures C1-2 and tell names of means people use for traveling -Write on the board and have ss to repeat -Write : He travels by train to explain meaning of travel -Ask ss to practice reading new words -Play game ‘Rub out and remember, to check vocabulary -Explain:Ask and answer about transportations Notice : By + mean -Guide ss to practice C1-2 -Call on ss practice -Correct STS’ ACTIVITES -Answer the questions -Present before class -Correct -Look at and tell -Copy down and repeat -Guess meaning -Practice -Play game -Listen and copy down -Practice -Work in pairs -Correct 3.Practice -Now ask and answer about people in C1 Eg:How does Lien go to school? She goes by bike -Call on some pairs practice -Correct CONTENTS -Listen and practice -Practice in pairs -Correct 1.Listen a)New words -bike (n) -motobike (n) -bus (n) -car (n) -walk (v) -train (n) -plane (n) travel ~ go (v) b)New stuctures Ask and answer about transportations -How you go to school? I go to school by bike -How does Lien go to school? She goes to school by bike -How does Mr.Hai travel to work? He travels to work by train =>How do/ does + S + go/ travel ? S + go(es)/ travel(s) + by + means of transportation Notice : By + mean 2.Practice Eg: How does Liengo to school? She goes by bike -Ask ss to practice with a partner C2 Eg:How does Mr Ba travel to work? He travels by motobike -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Ask ss to revise the question ask and answer about transportation *Notice:Don’t use ‘by, before ‘walk, -Ask ss to look at C3 p80 and explain the listening -Read the tape twice -Call on ss answer -Read again to check the answer -Ask ss some questions Eg: -How does Ba go to school? He goes to school by motobike -How does Mr Ha travel to work? He travel to work by train -Call on some pairs practice -Correct *Other activites -Ask ss to practice ask and answer about transportation of your partner -Call on ss practice and correct -Listen and practice -Revise -Look at and listen -Listen to the tape -Answer -Listen andcheck the answer -Work in pairs -Work in pairs -Correct Eg: How does Mr Ba travel to work? He travels by motobike 3.Listen and write the short answers a)By motobike b)By plane c)By bus d)By bike e)By bus f)By car g)By train h)Walks -How does Ba go to school? He goes to school by motobike -How does Mr Ha travel to work? =>Ask and answer about transportations *Other activites Eg:How you go to school? I go to school by bike -Practice in pairs 4.Consolidation: -Ask and answer about transportations 5.Home work: -How you go/ travel ? I go/ travel by + means -How does he/ she go/ travel ? She/ he goes/ travels by + means -Do exB4,5 –C1,2 p69-70 in work book -Prepare U7 C4-6 _ Preparetion date: Teaching date: Class: 6A period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6B period……….date……… total out…… Class: 6C period……….date……… total out…… Period 43: UNIT SEVEN: YOUR HOUSE Section C: On The Move Lesson5 : C4,5,6 ********* I.OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to -Skills:-Practice skills -Attitude:-Help sts to talk about everyday actions II.LANGUAGE CONTENTS: -Vocabulary: leave, start, end -Grammar: -How do/does + S + go/ travel ? S + go(es)/ travel(s) by + means -What time do/ does + S + V? S + V-s,es + at + time -Technique: Work in pairs, question & answer III.TEACHING AIDS: T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.PROCEDURE 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson -Ss go to the board read and answer about how people go (Ex2 p70 in work book) -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson TEACHER’S ACTIVITES I.Warm up -Control ss to play game ‘Slap the board with means STS’ACTIVITES -Play in groups CONTENTS Bus Motobike Bike Train -Correct Plane Car II.Presentation -Introduce the reading about Hoang’s everyday activities -Supplies the chart on BB -Ask ss match time with activites (Close their books) -Write the times on BB -Guides to read the text -Ask ss to check their predictions -Give correct answer -Explain some new words -Call on ss to read the text aloud -Ask ss answer the questions a-f -Call on some pairs practice -Correct 3.Practice -Now ask and answer about your friend Eg:What time you get up? I get up at 5.30 -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Ask ss to write their friend’s activities Eg:Minh gets up at 5.30 -Call on some Ss read their writing -Correct -Ask ss to play with words -Present before class -Correct -Listen -Match what time Hoang does the following things -Gives the times -Repeat in chorus -Check their predictions -Copy down -Read aloud -Answer the questions -Practice in pairs -Copy down 1.Listen and read (open) Prediction 1.He gets up a.11.30 2.He leaves the house b.7.00 3.School : starts c.6.30 4.School : ends d.5.30 5.He has lunch e.12.00 1.d; 2.c; 3.b; 4.a ;5.e (+)New words -leave (v) -start > < end (+)Answer a.He gets up at half past five b.He goes to school at half past six c.No, he doesn’t d.Yes, he does e.They start at seven f.They end at half past eleven -Listen and practice 2.Practice Eg:What time you get up? I get up at 5.30 -Practice in pairs -Correct -Listen and write Eg:Minh gets up at 5.30 3.Play with words What time you get up? I get up at five o’clock What time you go to school? I go to school at 6.30 6.Remember How you do/travel… ? I go/travel by…… How does he go/travel……? He goes /travel by… -Read -Correct -play with word 4.Consolidation: -Ask and answer about transportations -Ask and answer about time table 5.Home work: -Do exC3-4 p71 in work book _ Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 44: UNIT EIGHT: OUT AND ABOUT Section A: What are you doing? Lesson1 : A1-2-3 ********* I.OBJECTIVES: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to - Skills: -Practice skills - Attitude: Talk about transport II LANGUAGE CONTENTS: - Vocabulary: video games, ride, drive, wait for - Grammar: Present progressive tense - What + be + S + V-ing? - S + be + V-ing -Technique: Work in pairs, question & answer III.TEACHING AIDS: T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.PROCEDURE 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson TEACHER’S ACTIVITES STS’ACTIVITES CONTENTS 1.Warm up -Control ss to play game ‘What and Where,, with means -Write these words -Erases the words -Guides to read 2.Presentation -Ask ss to look at the pictures a-f p 82 and ask What is he/ she doing? What are they doing? -Introduce new words by pictures and situations -Write new words on the board and ask ss to repeat *Notice: to ride - to drive -Ask ss to practice new words -Check new words by ‘Rub out and remember, -Read and guide ss to read A1 -Call on ss to practice in pairs -Explain grammar: -Write and ask ss to compare pairs of sentences +I play video games I am playing video games +She rides her bike She is riding her bike +They travel to school by bus They are traveling to school by bus -Give form of present progeressive tense: S + Be + V-ing -Explain form of Whquestions Wh + Be + S +V-ing? -Ask ss to look at the pictures A1 and answer the -Read the words again and write them -Practise individua lly Bus Motobike Bike Train Plane -Look at and answer -Look at and listen -Copy down -Practice -Practice -Listen and repeat -Work in pairs -Look at and compare -Listen and copy down -Copy down -Practice -Present before class Car I.Listen and repeat 1.New words -video games (n) - to ride (v) -to drive (v) -to wait for (v) 2.Grammar The present progressive tense +Use: To express an action happenning now +I play video games I am playing video games +She rides her bike She is riding her bike +They travel to school by bus They are traveling to school by bus =>Form: S + Be + V-ing (+)Wh- questions What is she/ he doing? What are you/ they doing? =>What + Be + S + V-ing? II.Ask and answer Eg: What is he doing? He is playing videogames What is she doing? She is riding her bike What are they doing? They are walking to school questions A2 -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Listen and practice 3.Practice -Now ask and answer the question Eg:What are you doing? I am reading -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Ask ss to look at the pictures A3 ask and answer the questions and write the answers in their notebooks -Call on some Ss read their writing -Correct -Practice in pairs -Correct -Listen and write -Read -Correct III.Practice Eg:What are you doing? I am reading a.I’m doing my homework b.She is riding her bike c He is driving his car d They are waiting for a train 4.Consolidation: - The present progressive tense -What + be + S + V-ing? - S + be + V-ing 5.Home work: -Do exA1-2 p72-73 in work book Prepare A4-7 ………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 45: UNIT EIGHT: OUT AND ABOUT Section A: What are you doing? Lesson2 : A4- A7 ********* I.OBJECTIVES: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to - Skills: Reading, Listening, Speaking, and Writing - Attitude: Talk about transport II LANGUAGE CONTENTS: - Vocabulary: businessman - Grammar: Present progressive tense - Where is she /he going? She /He is going to school - Where are they going? They are going to school - How is she /he travelling? She/ He is travelling by bike III.TEACHING AIDS: T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV.PROCEDURE 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss answer the question Eg.What are you doing? I am playing video games ………… -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson TEACHER’S ACTIVITES STS’ACTIVITES 1.Warm up -Ask ss some questions -Listen and answer ?What are you doing, Ha? ?What is Ha doing , Minh? ?What are they doing? ?How you go to school? 2.Presentation -Ask ss to look at the pictures -Look at and answer A4 a-f p84 and answer What is he/ she doing? What are they doing? CONTENTS 1.Listen and number the picture as you hear 1- b 2-f 3- d 4-a 5- c 6- e -Introduce the listening:Listen and number the picture as you hear -Read the listening twice -Call on ss answer -Read again to check the answers -Give correct answer -Ask ss to look at A6 p85 and read -Call on ss to read aloud -Explain the questions: Where is she/ he going? How is she/ he travelling? -Ask ss to practice ask and answer the questions with Who, What, Where, How Ex:Who is that? That is Lan What does she do? She a student Where is she going? She is going to school How is she travelling? She travelling by bike -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Look at and listen -Listen and number -Answer -Listen and check -Copy down -Listen -Read aloud -Listen and copy down -Work in pairs -Present before class 3.Practice -Give cue words and ask ss to -Listen and practice practice -Now ask and answer the question Eg:Thu/ go/ school/ bike Where is Thu going? She is going to school How is she traveling? She is traveling by bike -Practice in pairs -Call on some pairs practice -Correct -Correct 4.Consolidation: * Play with words 2.Read Then ask and answer -Where is she/ he going? She/ he is going to school -Where are they going? They are going to school =>Where +Be + S +going? S + Be + going? -How is she/ he travelling? She/ He is travelling by bike -How are you travelling? I’m travelling by bike =>How + Be + S +traveling? S + Be + traveling by +mean? Ex: S1:Who is that? S2:That is Lan S1:What does she do? S2:She a student S1:Where is she going? S2:She is going to school S1:How is she travelling? S2:She travelling by bike 3.Practice Eg:Thu/ go/ school/ bike Where is Thu going? She is going to school How is she traveling? She is traveling by bike a.MrsHanh/ go/ Hai Phong/ train b.Nam & Hung/ go/ Dalat/ plane c I/ go / Ha Long/ car - Present progressive tense +Where +Be + S +going? S + Be + going? +How + Be + S +traveling? S + Be + traveling by +mean? 5.Home work: -Do exA3-4 p73 in work book -Prepare B1 ……………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 46: UNIT EIGHT: OUT AND ABOUT Section B: A truck driver Lesson3: B1 I.OBJECTIVES: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to -Skills: - Practice skills -Attitude: Work hard II LANGUAGE CONTENTS Vocabulary: truck, driver, farmer, foodstall, load, unload,arrive,… Grammar: - The present progressive tense: + What + to be + S + V- ing? - S + am/ is/ are + V- ing + O III TEACHING AIDS: -T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards -Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV PROCEDUCE: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson TEACHER'S ACTIVITIESSTS' ACTIVITIES 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor + What's the date? asnwers + How are you? 2, Presentation: - Introduce the new lesson * Pre- reading: -Listen to the teacher - Look at the pictures, - Look at the CONTENTS New words - Truck (n): xe tải - Driver (n): tài xế - Farmer (n): người nông dân - Load (v): xếp/ chất hàng lên xe - Unload (v): dỡ hàng please + What is this? + What does he do? + What are they doing? - Explain the meaning of new words - Read after to me? + Who can read? - Explain the text pictures - It's a "xe tải" - He's a "tài xế" - Họ chất hàng lên xe - Write down - Read in chorus - Some students read the new words - Listen to the teacher - Foodstall (n): cửa hàng ăn - Arrive (v): đến Put the sentences in the correct order - e: Going to a farm - b: Meeting the farmer - d: Loading the vegetables - a: Driving to Ha Noi - f: Unloading the vegetables 3, Comprehension check: - c: Eating breakfast * While- reading: - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can read the text? - Give some informations and ask students to put them in the correct order a, Driving to Ha Noi b, Meeting the farmer c, Eating breakfast d, Loading the vegetables e, Going to a farm f, Unloading the vegetables + Who can give the answers? - Ask and answer the questions Answer key a, He's a truck driver b, He's going to a farm c, A farmer waiting for him d, He's taking the vegetables to the market e, He's eating his breakfast f, He's eating at a foodstall 4, Practice: * Post- reading: - Explain the dialogue - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read the dialogue? - Explain the interrogative - Ask students to answer the questions + Who can ask and answer? - Give answer key * Play with words: - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) - Explain the meaning of - Listen to the tape - Some students read the text - Students in minutes - Some students give their answers - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - Listen to the teacher - Students in minutes - Practice in pairs - Check again - Listen to the tape - Listen and write down * Play with words: - Spider (n): mhện - Fly (n): bướm - Make (v): làm, chế tạo, … - Web (n): mạng nhện new words + Who can read? 4.Consolidation: - New words - The text - The present progressive tense Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Do exercises 1, 2, / 74 ……………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 47: UNIT EIGHT: OUT AND ABOUT Section B: A truck driver Lesson4: B2,3 I.OBJECTIVES: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to -Skills: - Practice skills -Attitude: Work hard II LANGUAGE CONTENTS Vocabulary: coppy,correcting,… Grammar: - The present progressive tense: + What + to be + S + V- ing? - S + am/ is/ are + V- ing + O III TEACHING AIDS: -T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards -Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV PROCEDUCE: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson TEACHER'S ACTIVITIESSTS' ACTIVITIES CONTENTS 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check the previous lesson What are you doing? What is she doing? What is he doing? What are they doing 2, Presentation: - Introduce the new lesson Play the tape Listen and check Listen and check Ask and answer What are you doing? What is she doing? What is he doing? What are they doing? 1.Listen and repeat.Then answer the question Listen to the tape and then Repeat Ask and answer the question Practice in pair a.What is Ba doing? He is doing his homework P1:Lan P2:Ba b.Is he doing his math Yes,he is Practice in pair again c.Is he coppying Nam’s work? No,he isn’t What are you doing? I’m writing d.What is Tuan doing? He is playing soccer What is he doing? e.Are Nga and Huong What are they doing? working? No,they aren’t What is she doing? 2.Play with words “Are you working” Says the fly to the spider “Yes,I am” Says the spider to the fly Read aloud Read the play with words Call on some ss read their Correct “What are you doing?” Says the fly to the spider “I am making a web” Says the spider to the fly ……………………… ……………………… ……………………… 3.Remember writing Correct What is he doing? He is driving his truck Where is he going? He is going to a farm 4.Consolidation: Homework: - The present progressive tense - Do exercises 3,4 / 74 Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 48: UNIT EIGHT: OUT AND ABOUT Section C: Road signs Lesson5: C1,2 I OBJECTIVES : - By the end of the lesson, students’ will be able to - Skills: - Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to talk about the traffic and talk about abilitty with "can/ can't" -Work hard II LANGUAGE CONTENTS Vocabulary :road, road sign, difficult, go ahead, turn right/ left, park,stop policeman, job, one way, say, ….……… Grammar: - Modal verb: Can/ can't III TEACHING AIDS: -T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards -Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV PROCEDUCE: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson TEACHER'S ACTIVITIESSTS' ACTIVITIES 1, Warm up: CONTENTS New words + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check the old lesson: - Call students to go the board and exercise 2, Presentation: - Introduce the new lesson - Look at the pictures, please + What is this? + Who is he? - Explain the meaning of new words - Read after me + Who can read? 3, Comprehension check: - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read the text? - Explain the new structure with "can/ can't" + Who can make sentences? - Look at the pictures, please + What does the sign say? 4, Practice: - Ask students exercise 2/89 - The monitor asnwers S1: Read the text and answer the questions S2: Make sentences with present progressive tense - Listen to the teacher - Look at the pictures - It's a "biển báo" - He's a "cảnh sát" - Listen and write down - Read in chorus - Some students - Listen to the tape - Road (n) = street (n) - Road sign (n): biển báo giao thông - Policeman (n): cảnh sát - Dificult (adj): khó khăn - Job (n): nghề nghiệp - Say (v): nói - One way (n): chiều - Can (mv): có thể - Can not = can't: không thể - Go ahead (v): thẳng - Turn right/ left (v): rẽ phải/ trái - Park (v): đỗ New structure: - You can park here - You can't park here (+) S + can + V- inf + O (-) S + can + not + V- inf + O (?) Can/ Can't + S + V- inf … Example: - I can ride my bike - Some students read - She can't speak English the text + Can he swim? - Listen to the teacher - Yes, he can./ No, he can't and write down Complete the sentences - Some students Answer key make sentences a, You can turn left - Look at the b, You can't turn right pictures c, You can go ahead - It says "You can d, You can't ride a motorbike park here" 4.Practice: - Students Answer key exercise 2/ 89 in a, You can't turn left minutes b, You can turn right - Work in pairs c, You can't ride a bike - Check again d, You can't park here - Look at the pictures and practice in pairs + Who can ask and answer? - Give answer key - Show some the road signs and ask students to practice with a partner + Who can ask answer about - Practice in pairs yourselves? Consolidation: - New words - Modal verb: Can/ can't Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Do exercises 1, 2/ 75 ……………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 49: UNIT EIGHT: OUT AND ABOUT Section C: Road signs Lesson6: C3,4 I OBJECTIVES : - By the end of the lesson, students’ will be able to -Skills: - Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to talk about someone must or mustn't something -Work hard II LANGUAGE CONTENTS Vocabulary: slow down, go fast, warn, help, intersection, accident, dangerous, must, musn't, discipline, go straight ahead, ….……… Grammar: - Modal verb: must/ must not III TEACHING AIDS: -T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board ,studying cards -Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV PROCEDUCE: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson TEACHER'S ACTIVITIESSTS’ ACTIVITIES 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? - The monitor asnwers CONTENTS New words - Intersection (n): ngã tư - Dangerous (adj): nguy hiểm + How are you? 2, Presentation: - Show the picture and ask students look at it - What can you see in the picture? - Explain the meaning of the new words - Read after me + Who can read ? 3, Comprehension check: - Introduce the text - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can read the text? - Explain the new structure with "must/ must not" + Who can make sentences? - Look at the pictures, please + What does the sign say? + What must you do? - Accident (n): tai nạn - Discipline (n): - Warn (v): cảnh báo - Look at the picture - Slow down (v): chậm lại - Go fast (v): nhanh - I can see "ngã tư" - Stop (v): dừng lại - Go straight ahead (v): thẳng - Listen - repeat and phía trước write down - Must (mv): phải - Read in chorus - Must not (mv): không - Some students read New structure: - You must slow down - You mustn't go fast - Listen to the (+) S + must + V- inf + O teacher (-) S + mustn't + not + V- inf + - Listen to the tape O (?) Must + S + V- inf + O? - Some students read Example: the text - Listen and write - I must your homework down - We mustn't smoke here + Must you go home? - Some students - Yes, I must./ No, I mustn't make sentences - Look at the Listen: pictures Answer key - It says "Stop" -c: You can't turn right here - We must stop - d: There's a stop sign I must stop - h: You can't park your car here - a: you must slow down There's an intersection - Look at the signs - g: You can enter that road and listen to the Look at the sign teacher introduces - b: We can turn left here - f: You can't ride motorbike on - Listen to the tape this street 4, Practice: - Show the signs and ask students to listen to the tape and number the sign as they hear - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can give the - Some students give answers? answers + Who can point the sign - Work in pairs and who can say? 4.Practice: P1: Point the sign b/ c/ a/ … P2: We can turn left/ … 4.Consolidation: - New words - Modal verb: Must/ Mustn't Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Do exercises 3, 4/ 76 ………………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 50: GRAMMAR PRACTICE ********* I.OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, sts will be able to -Skills: - Practice skills - Attitude: - Work hard -Do exercises II.LANGUAGE CONTENTS Vocabulary: Revise Grammar: - Present simple/ progressive tenses - Prepositions - Question words - Modal verb: must/ must not III TEACHING AIDS: -T: Text book, teacher’s book, plan, pictures, sub-board -Ss: Text books, notebooks ,pens IV PROCEDUCE: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson TEACHER'S ACTIVITIESSTS' ACTIVITIES 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor + What's the date? asnwers + How are you? S1: Make sentences * Check the old lesson: with can/ can't - Call students to go the S2: Make sentences board with must/ mustn't CONTENTS I Grammar: Present simple tense a, Use: every ~ b, Form: + To be: am/ is/ are 2, Presentation: + Who can repeat the usage of the present simple tense? + Who can repeat the form of it? - Explain again and give the examples + Who can make the sentences? + Who can repeat the usage of the present progressive tense? + Who can repeat the form of it? - Explain again and give the examples + who can make the sentences? + Who can repeat the prepositions? + Who can make sentences? + Who can repeat the question words? + Who can ask and answer? + Who can repeat the modal verbs you have learnt? + Who can make sentences? 3, Comprehension check: - Ask students to exercises * Exercise1: + Who can complete the dialogues, using the correct form of the verbs? - Give answer key * Exercise 2: + Who can complete the sentences? - Give answer key * Exercise 3: + Who can complete the first / second/ … sentence in the passage? - Give answer key - Some students repeat - Listen and write down - Some students make sentences - Some students repeat - Listen and write down - Some students make sentences - Some students repeat - Some students make - Some students repeat - Work in pairs - Some students repeat - Some students make - Students exercises - He is an engineer + Verbs: V/ V-s, -es - We play soocer every afternoon - She watches TV after school Present progressive tense a, Use: now, right now, at the moment, at present b, Form: am/ is/ are + V- ing - They are listening to music now Prepositions: on, in, at, to the left of, to the right of, in front of, behind, opposite, … - There is a store opposite my house Question words: What, Where, When, Who, How, Which, + Where are you going now? - I'm going to the market Modal verbs: Can/ Can't, Must/ Mustn't - He can play tennis - She can't drive a car - We must the homework - They mustn't play soccer on the street II Exercises: 1, Present simple tense a, go b, travel c, walk/ don't walk/ Does … walk/ walks - Work in pairs - Check again - Some students read their sentences - Check again - Some students complete sentences 2, Present progressive tense a, is riding e, is listening b, are waiting f, are walking c, is watching g, is traveling d, are playing 3, Prepositions in/ in front of/ behind/ opposite/ to the right of/ to the left of * Exercise 4: + Who can complete dialogues? - Give answer key * Exercise 5: + Who can complete the sentences? - Give answer key * Exercise 6: + Who can complete the sentences? - Give answer key * Exercise 7: + Who can complete the sentences? - Give answer key - Check again - Work in pairs - Check again - Some students complete - Give answer key - Some students complete - Check again - Some students complete - Check again 4, Question words a, Where c, What b, Who d, What 5, Contrast: present simple and present progressive tenses b, rides/ is riding c, go/ are going d, walk/ am walking e, drives/ is driving 6.must and must not/mustn’t a.must /must not b.must /must not /must not c.must /must not 7.can and cannot /can’t Cannot /can’t Can Cannot /can’t 4.Consolidation: -Present simple tense -Present progressive tense - Modal verb:can/can’t - Modal verb: Must/ Mustn't Homework: - Do again the exercises ………………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 51: REVISION I.OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to Skills: Practice skills Attitude: Work hard II LANGUAGE: CONTENTS 1, Vocabulary: 2, Grammar: - Tenses of the verbs III TEACHING AIDS: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,…………………… IV PROCEDUCE: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson 3.New lesson TEACHER'S ACTIVITIESSTS' ACTIVITIES 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor + What's the date? asnwers + How are you? 2, Presentation: - Give students some exercises and ask them to * Exercise 1: Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets Thu (go) … to school by bike every day Their house (have) … a big yard She (live) … in a small village Ba's father (work) … in a factory I (play) … soccer in the stadium every day She (eat) … her lunch at twelve o'clock They (go) … to bed at 10 p.m His mother (work) … in a hospital There (be) … a park near - Listen to the teacher - Write down exercise - Students exercise in 10 minutes my house 10 There (be) … many trees and flowers in the garden - Some students read + Who can complete? their sentences - Give answer key - Check again * Exercise 2: Underline and correct the mistakes Lan go to school by car Miss Hoa walks to his office CONTENTS I Exercises: * Exercise 1: Supply the correct form of the verb in the brackets Thu goes to school by bike every day Their house has a big yard She lives in a small village Ba's father works in a factory I play soccer in the stadium every day She eats her lunch at twelve o'clock They go to bed at 10 p.m His mother works in a hospital There is a park near my house 10 There are many trees and flowers in the garden * Exercise 2: Underline and correct the mistakes Lan go to school by car (goes) Miss Hoa walks to his office (her) He wash his face every morning (washes) They live at the city (in) What's your name? - Your name's Vy (My) Are your house old? (Is) How Mr Tan travel to work? - With bus (does/ By) It's six past twenty (twenty past six) What v the time? (is) 10 There's v eraser at the box (an/ in) He wash his face every morning They live at the city What's your name? - Your name's Vy Are your house old? How Mr Tan travel to work? - With bus It's six past twenty What the time? 10 There's eraser at the box + Who can correct the mistakes? - Give answer key * Exercise 3: Change the sentences into negative and interrogative Mai brushes her teeth every day There is a flower on the table I walk to school every morning They live in a small village I am a student + Who can change? - Give answer key - Students exercise in 10 minutes * Exercise 3: Change the sentences into negative and interrogative Mai doesn't brush her teeth every day - Does Mai brush her teeth every day? There isn't a flower on the table - Is there a flower on the table? I don't walk to school every day - Do you walk to school every day? They don't live in a small village - Do they live in a small village? I am not a student - Are you a student? - Some students correct the mistakes - Check again - Students exercise in 10 minutes - Some students read their sentences - Check again 4.Consolidation: - The exercises Homework: - Do again the exercises ……………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 52: REVISION I.OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to Skills: Practice skills Attitude: Work hard II LANGUAGE CONTENTS 1, Vocabulary: 2, Grammar: - Tenses of the verbs III TEACHING AIDS: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,… IV PROCEDUCE: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson 3.New lesson TEACHER'S ACTIVITIESSTS' ACTIVITIES 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? - The monitor asnwers 2, Presentation: - Give students some exercises and ask them to * Exercise 1: Make the questions for underlined words Our friends are playing in the garden Mr Tan is working in his room It's ten to ten My sister is doing her homework My mother works in a hospital Mr Nam goes to work by car every day Her brother is an engineer + Who can ask / answer? - Give answer key - Listen to the teacher - Write down exercise - Students exercise in 10 minutes - Work in pairs - Check again I Exercises: * Exercise 1: Make the questions for underlined words Where are your friends playing? What is Mr Tan doing in his room? What time is it? What is your sister doing? Where does your mother work? How does Mr Nam go to work every day? What does her brother do? * Exercise 2: Put the words or phrases in correct order to make sentences What is your mother doing? What are Nam and Ba doing now? That businessman is going to Ha Noi now You must drive your car carefully There are many accidents on our roads He is driving his truck You can't go into that street Who is waiting for him? * Exercise 2: Put the words or phrases in correct order to make sentences doing/ is/ mother/ what/ CONTENTS - Students in 10 your? Nam/ Ba/ are/ what/ doing/ now/ and? that/ Ha Noi/ to/ going/ businessman/ is/ now must / you/ drive/ carefully/ car/ your roads/ accidents/ many/ are/ there/ on/ our truck/ is/ he/ driving/ his street/ can't/ you/ into/ go/ that waiting/ is/ who/ him/ for? + Who can read your sentences? - Give answer key * Exercise 3: Answer the following questions Are these your books? Is your new house big or small? How many bikes are there in the house? What does Lan every morning? Where is she going now? + Who can ask/ answer? - Give answer key minutes - Some students read their sentences - Check again * Exercise 3: Answer the following questions Yes, they are No, they aren't My house is big/ small There is one bike in the house There are two/ three/ bikes in the house She goes to school every morning She is going to the market/ … - Students exercise in 10 minutes - Work in pairs - Check again 4.Consolidation: - The exercises Homework: - Do again the exercises ………………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 53: THE FIRST SEMESTER ……………………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 54: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 31/12/2012 date: 2/1/2013 date: 2/1/2013 date: 2/1/2013 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT NINE: THE BODY Section A: Parts of the body Lesson 1: A1,A2 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about some of the parts of the body 2.Skills: Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: head, shoulder, arm, chest, hand, finger, leg, foot, toe, Grammar: + What is that? + What are those? - That is his head - Those are his fingers III Teaching aids: -T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape, -Ss: book, notebook,pens… IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor asnwers + What's the date? + How are you? Presentation: - Show the picture and ask students look at it - What can you see in the picture? - Explain the meaning of the new words - Read after me + Who can read ? - Look at the picture - I can see "®Çu/ m¾t/ tai/ vai/ ngùc/ ……." - Listen - repeat and write down - Read in chorus - Some students read Comprehension check: - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can read the words? + Who can talk in English and the other talk again in Vietnamese? - Listen to the tape Practice: - Ask students look at the pictures and work in pairs + Who can ask and answer? - Let students play "Guessing game" a, It is on the top of your body What is it? b, They are at the end of your legs What are they? c, It is between your arms What is it? d, They are on your hand What are they? - Look at the picture - Some students read - Work in pairs - Work in pairs - Students play game - Head - Feet - Chest chest head shoulder I New words: - Head (n): ®Çu - Shoulder (n): vai - Arm (n): c¸nh tay - Chest (n): ngùc - Hand (n): bµn tay - Finger (n): ngãn tay - Leg (n): c¼ng ch©n - Foot (n): bµn ch©n - Toe (n): ngãn ch©n II Practice: Example: + What is that? - That is his head + What are those? - Those are his shoulders * Play game: Guessing game a, It is on the top of your body What is it? - Head b, They are at the end of your legs What are they? - Feet c, It is between your arms What is it? - Chest d, They are on your hand What are they? - Fingers - Fingers 2.Noughts and crosses - Students play game * Play game "Noughts and crosses" Contents chest feet toes head shoulder fingers hands arm legs feet toes fingers hands arm legs 4.Consolidation: - New words + What is that? - That is his head + What are those? - Those are his shoulders Homework:- Learn by heart new words - Do exercises 1, ……………………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 55: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 31 /12/2012 date: 2/1/2013 date: 2/11/2013 date: 2/11/2013 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT NINE: THE BODY Section A: Parts of the body Lesson 2: A3,A4 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe simply about appearance of the people 2.Skills: Practice skills 3.Attitude: - Love subjects -Work hard II.Language Contents: Vocabulary: tall, fat, heavy, strong, short, thin, light, weak, ….… Grammar: * S + be + adj - He is fat - She is thin III.Teaching aids: -T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: text book, notebook,pens… IV.Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board and practice ex in work book -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor + What's the date? asnwers + How are you? - Call two students go to the S1: Does exercise board S2: Does exercise 2.Presentation: - Show the picture and ask students look at it - What can you see in the picture? Can you describe about him? ……… - Explain the meaning of the new words - Read after me + Who can read ? - Let students play game " What and Where" - Look at the picture I New words: - Tall (adj): cao - Short (adj): thấp - Thin (adj):gầy - Fat (adj): béo - Heavy (adj): nặng - Light (adj): nhẹ - Strong (adj): khỏe - Weak (adj): yếu - He is "cao/ thÊp/ bÐo/ gÇy/ kháe/ yÕu/……." - Listen - repeat and write down - Read in chorus - Some students read II Model sentences: - Students play game - He is tall - She is short - She is thin Comprehension check: - He is fat - Listen to the tape and - Listen to the tape - He is heavy repeat , please and read in chorus - She is light (3 times) * Structure: + Who can read again? - Some students read S + be + adj + Who can remark about the - Students remark - I am tall and heavy structure? - Explain again the structure - Listen and write and give the examples down + Who can make sentences? - Some students make sentences + Who can desribe about the - Students describe members of your family? their members in their family Practice: - Ask students look at the - Look at the pictures II Practice: pictures in the part 4/ 98 in part 4/ 98 Listen and choose the right + Is this woman short or - She is thin and tall picture tall? thin or fat? Answer key - Now , listen to the tape and - Listen to the tape 1-d 2-c you choose the right and choose the right - b 4-a pictrure picture (3 times) Play game + Who can choose and read - Some students give S1: She is short, thin and light the sentence? their answers Who is she? - Give answer key - Check again S2: Is she Thu? - Let students play - Play game S1: Yes, she is./ No, she isn't "Guessing game" S1: She is short, thin + Who can describe about and light Who is your classmate and the other she? guess "Who is he/ she?"? S2: Is she Thu? S1: Yes, she is./ No, she isn't 4.Consolidation: - New words - Structure: S + be + adj + Who can repeat the main contents of the lesson Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Do exercise Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 56: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 31 /12/2012 date: 2/1/2013 date: 2/11/2013 date: 2/11/2013 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT NINE: THE BODY Section A: Parts of the body Lesson 3: A5,A6 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to describe about appearances of the people 2.Skills: Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard II.Language Contents: Vocabulary: gymnast, weightlifter, Grammar: * S + be + adj - He is strong - She is not weak III.Teaching aids: -T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape, -Ss: text book, notebook, pens IV.Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson - Ss go to the board and ex in work book -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor + What's the date? asnwers I The text: + How are you? S1: write the New words: - Call two students go to the structure and make board sentences S2: Does exercise Presentation: - Show the picture and ask - Look at the picture students look at it - What can you see in the - I see "vận động first / second picture? viên TD/ vận động viªn cö t¹" - Explain the meaning of the - Listen - repeat and new words write down - Read after me - Read in chorus + Who can read ? - Some students read Comprehension check: - Introduce the texts - Look at the pictures - Listen to the tape and repeat , please (3 times) + Who can read again? - Listen to the teacher - Look at the pictures - Listen to the tape and repeat - Gymnast (n): vận động viên thÓ dôc - Weight lifter (n): vận động viªn cö t¹ II Exercise: a Chi is a teacher b She is tall c She is fat d She is light and she is weak e Tuan is a gymnast f He is short g He is not fat but he is heavy h He is strong F T F F F T F T - Some students read the texts - Give students exercise - Students "True or false" exercise in minutes II Practice: - Let students in Example minutes Nam: Who is that? + Who can read and check? - Some students read Lien: That's Chi and give their Nam: What does she do? answers Lien: She is a gymnast - Give answer key - Check again Nam: Is she short? Lien: No, she isn't She is tall 4.Practice: - Ask students exercise in - Look at the part * Suggestions part Van Quyen is a football + Who can read the - Work in pairs player He is tall He is thin but example? he is heavy He is strong + Who can ask and answer - Practice in pairs about Chi/ Tuan? + Who can describe about - Some students famous persons? describe 4.Consolidation: - New words - The text + Who can repeat the main contents of the lesson Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Do exercise ……………………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 57: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 31 /12/2012 date: 2/1/2013 date: 2/11/2013 date: 2/11/2013 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT NINE: THE BODY Section B: Faces Lesson 4: B1,B2,B3 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of lesson, students will be able to describe about the parts of head and face They can know about the colors in order to describe about person and things 2.Skills: Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Love subjects -Work hard II.Language Constents: Vocabulary: hair, ear, eye, nose, mouth, lips, round, oval, full, black, white, yellow, green, blue, brown, purple, red, gray, orange, ….……… Grammar: + What color is her hair? - It's black + What color are her eyes? - They're brown III.Teaching aids: -T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan,sub board -Ss: text book, notebook,pens IV.Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to board and read the ex in the book -Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents 1.Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor asnwers + What's the date? + How are you? - Students play in - Let students play game minutes "Jumble words" + gynnast + light + sngtaym + ihltg + heavy + weight + vhyae + githwe fetilr lifter I New words: - Faces (n): khuôn mặt Presentation: - Look at the picture - Hair (n): tóc - Show the picture about the and answer - Ear (n): tai faces and ask students look - Eye (n): mắt at it - I see "khuôn mặt " - Nose (n): mũi - What can you see in the - It's "tai/ mắt/ m ũi/ - Mouth (n): miệng picture? miệng/ tóc/ môi/ răng" - Lips (n): môi + What's this? - Listen and write - Round (adj): tròn down - Oval (adj): ô voan - Explain the meaning of the - Read in chorus - Full (adj): dầy, đầy đặn new words - Some students read - Long (adj): dài - Read after me - Short (adj): ngắn + Who can read ? - Black (adj): đen - Look at the pictures - White (adj): trắng 3.Comprehension check: - Listen to the tape and - Gray (adj): xám - Look at the pictures repeat - Red (adj): đỏ - Orange (adj): màu cam - Listen to the tape and - Some students read - Yellow (adj): vàng repeat , please - Look at the pictures - Green (adj): xanh lá (3 times) and guess the colors - Blue (adj): xanh da trời + Who can read again? - Read after the teacher - Brown (adj): nâu - Show the pictures about - Listen to the tape and - Purple (adj): tím the colors repeat - Color (n): màu sắc - Read after me II Practice: - Some students read Example - Listen to the tape and - Look at the doll + What color is her hair? repeat - It's black - It's black (3 times) - They're brown + What color are her eyes? + Who can read, please - Look at their friend - They' re brown - Look at the doll - It's black + What color is her hair? - They're black * Game: + What color are her eyes? "Noughts and crosses" - Look at Lan + What color is her hair? - Work in pairs oval black full + What color are her eyes? teeth thin hair - Practice in pairs long lips blue 4.Practice: - Ask students to practice in pairs + Who can ask and answer? - Students play game in (pictures in B3) minutes - Let students play game " Noughts and crosses" oval teeth black thin full hair long lips blue 4.Consolidation: + Who can repeat the main contents of the lesson - New words + What color is …… ? - It's ………… + What color are ………? - They' re …………… Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Do exercise 1, ……………………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 58: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 31 /12/2012 date: 2/1/2013 date: 2/11/2013 date: 2/11/2013 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT NINE: THE BODY Section B: Faces Lesson 5: B4,B5,B6 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of lesson, students will be able to describe about features of the faces and appearances 2.Skills: Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard II.Language constents: Vocabulary: knee, ….……… Grammar: + What color is her hair? - It's black + What color are her eyes? - They're brown - Or- question III.Teaching aids: -T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,sub board -Ss: text book, notebook, pens IV.Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor + What's the date? asnwers + How are you? - Let students play game "Slap the board" I The text: mouth hair eyes lips ear teeth nose Presentation: * Pre- reading: - Show the picture about Miss Chi - Who can describe about her, use the verb "have"? - Listen and correct their mistakes Comprehension check: * While- reading: - Listen to the tape and repeat , please (3 times) + Who can read again? - Let students play game "Lucky numbers" 10 11 12 Practice: * Post- reading: - Ask students to describe about people in the pictures in part B5 + Who can describe? - Listen to the tape and number the right picture you hear (3 times) + Who can ask and answer about these people? - Give answer key - Let students play game " Net works" short long Example: + Is Miss Chi's face oval or - Students play game round? in minutes - It' s round * "Lucky numbers" Is Miss Chi tall and fat? - No, she isn't She is tall and thin Lucky number Is her hair long? - Yes, it is - Look at the picture What color is her hair? - It' s black - Some students Lucky number describe What color are her eyes? - She' s tall and thin - They are brown - She has a round Does she have a big noseface No, she doesn't She has a small nose Does she have full lips? - Listen to the tape - Yes, she does and repeat What color are her teeth? - They are white - Some students read 10 Are her teeth big? - No, they aren't 11 Lucky number 12 Is her face round or oval? - Students play game - It is round in minutes - Some students describe about these people - Listen and number the right picture - Work in pairs II Practice: Example a, thin lips, short hair, big nose b, long hair, full lips, round face Work in pair S1: Does "d" have a big nose? S2: Yes, he does S1: Is his face round or oval? S2: It is round - Check again * Game: "Net work" round oval - Students play game in minutes hair big thin facefull head lips nose small 4.Consolidation: + Who can repeat the main contents of the lesson - Or- question Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Do exercise 3, 4, ……………………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 59: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 31 /12/2012 date: 2/1/2013 date: 2/11/2013 date: 2/11/2013 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT TEN: STAYING HEALTHY Section A: How you feel? Lesson 1: A1,A2 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of thelesson, students will be able to ask about feeling and food or drink what pepole want 2.Skills: Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: feel, hungry, thirsty, full, tired, orange, juice, noodle, Grammar: Would like + N to- inf + What would you like? - I' d like some orange juice III.Teaching aids: -T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,sub board -Ss: pens, text book, notebook IV.Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson Call some ss go to board and ex in work book Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call two students go to the board and exercises 2, Presentation: * Pre- reading: - Show the pictures and ask students guess the feeling of these people + What is he doing? + How does he feel? - Explain the meaning of new words - Read after me + Who can read ? - Introduce the sentences - Listen to the tape and repeat, please (3 times) + Who can read ? - Explain the question about feeling + How you feel? - I am hungry/ thirsty/ … + Who can ask and answer about these people? 3.Comprehension check: - Introduce the dialogue - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can read the dialogue? - Explain the model sentences + What would you like? - I' d like some orange juice + How does Lan feel? + What would she like? Practice: Sts' activities Contents - The monitor asnwers S1: does exrcise S2: does exercise - Look at the pictures and guess the feeling of these people - Cậu ăn./ Cậu đói - Listen to the teacher and write down - Read in chorus - Some students read - Listen to the teacher and write - Listen to the tape - Some students read - Listen and write down - Work in pairs I New words: - Feel (v): cảm thấy - Hungry (adj): đói - Thirsty (adj): khát - Full (adj): no - Hot (adj): nóng - Cold (adj): lạnh - Tired (adj): mệt mói - Would like (MV): muốn ,thích - Orange juice (n): nước cam - Noodles (n): phở - Drink (v/ n): uống, đồ uống * Model sentences: + How you feel? - I' m hungry II The dialogue: * Model sentences: + What would you like? - I' d like some orange juice + What would Nam like? - He' d like some noodles - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the tape - Practice in pairs - Listen and write down - She is hot and thirsty - She' d like some orange juice III Practice: + How you feel? - I' m ………………… + What would you like? - I' d like ……………… - Ask students practice with a partner about these people + Who can ask and answer? - Ask students ask answer about their classmates + How you feel? - I'm ………… + What would you like? - I' d like ……………… - Let students study card: Asnwer the questions a, What would you like? - …………… (orange juice) b, What would she like? - ……………… (noodles) c, What would they like? - ………………… (drinks) + Who can ask and answer? * Study card Answer key a, What would you like? - I' d like some orange juice b, What would she like? - She' d like some noodles c, What would they like? - They' d like some drinks - Work in pairs - Students in minutes - Work in pairs 4.Consolidation: - New words - Model sentences: + How you feel? - I' m …………… + What would you like? - I' d like ……………… Homework: - Learn by heart new words and model sentences - Do exercise …………………………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 60: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 31 /12/2012 date: 2/1/2013 date: 2/11/2013 date: 2/11/2013 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT TEN: STAYING HEALTHY Section A: How you feel? Lesson 2: A3,A4 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge:By the end of thelesson, students will be able to ask about feeling and food or drink what pepole want 2.Skills: Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: feel, hungry, thirsty, full, tired, orange, juice, noodle, Grammar: Would like + N to- inf + What would you like? - I' d like some orange juice III.Teaching aids: -T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,sub board -Ss: pens, text book, notebook IV.Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson Call some ss go to board and ex in work book Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1.Warm up; -Ask some ss the questions: How you feel? How does he feel? How does she feel? How they feel? Presentation: -Introduce the dialogue: Nam, Lan, Ba - Explain the listening - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) Listen and check and then give the work Look at the picture about Ba, Nam, Lan Listen and check Sts' activities Contents -Listen and answer I’m hot -Correct He is full She is thirsty They are cold - Students look at the pictures and guest Nam, Lan, Ba - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs P1:Nam P2:Lan P3:Ba Practice in group again -Tired -Hungry -Thirsty Practice in pair P1: ask P2: answer Practice: - Ask students practice with a partner about these people - Work in pairs + Who can ask and answer? 1.Listen and repeat.What would you like? Look at the dialogue in the book: Nam, Lan, Ba -Nam is hungry -Ba is tired -Lan is hot and thirsty 2.Ask and answer about Nam ,Ba, Lan How does Nam feel? He feels hungry What would he like? He’d like noodles How does Lan feel? She feels hot and thirsty What would she like? She’d like a drink How does Ba feel? He feels tired What would he like? He’d like to sit down - Ask students ask answer about their classmates + How you feel? - I'm ………… + What would you like? - I' d like ……………… * Study card Answer key a, What would you like? - I' d like some orange juice b, What would she like? - She' d like some noodles c, What would they like? - They' d like some drinks 4.Consolidation: - New words - Model sentences: + How you feel? - I' m …………… + What would you like? - I' d like ……………… Homework: - Learn by heart new words and model sentences - Do exercise …………………………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 61: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 31 /12/2012 date: 2/1/2013 date: 2/11/2013 date: 2/11/2013 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT TEN: STAYING HEALTHY Section A: How you feel? Lesson3: A5,A6,A7 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about What they want 2.Skills: Practice skills 3.Attitude: - Work hard - Love subjects II.Language contents: Vocabulary: want, …………… Grammar: + What you want? - I want …………… III.Teaching aids: -T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape, sub board -Ss: pens, text book, notebook IV.Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Noughts and crosses" feel thirsty cold 'd like hungry tired Sts' activities - The monitor asnwers - Students play in minutes I Listen: Answer key Phuong: b Ba: f Nhan: a Huong: d full noodles hot Presentation: - Ask students look at the situations in the pictures and remark - Explain the listening - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can ask answer? - Give answer key - If someone tired, what you ask in order to know? You notice in part 6/ 106 Comprehension check: - Introduce the dialogue - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can read the dialogue? - Explain the model sentences + What's the matter with you? - I' m cold + What you want? - I want a hot drink Practice: - Ask students use the given words and make a dialogue Contents - Students look at the pictures and remark - Listen and write down - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - Check again - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - Listen and write down - Students make the dialogue - Work in pairs - Check again II The dialogue: * Model sentences: + What' s the matter, Dung? = How you feel? - I' m cold + What you want? - I want a hot drink III Practice: Answer key a, What' s the matter, Linh? - I' m hot + What you want? - I want a cold drink b, What' s the matter with Mai? - She' s hungry + What does she want? - She wants some noodles c, What's the matter with Ba? - He' s thirsty + What does he want? - He wants a drink + Who can ask and answer? - Give answer key - Students take a survey * Take a survey - Ask students to take a in minutes feeling tired cold hot "Survey" name Yen v v feeling tired cold hot Mai name Long Yen v v - Practice in pairs Dung Mai Long Dung - Listen to the tape + Who can ask and asnwer? - Some students read * Play with words: - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read? 4.Consolidation: Who can repeat the main contents of the lesson - New words - Model sentences: + What's the matter, … ? - I' m …………… + What you want? - I want ……………… Homework: - Learn by heart new words and model sentences - Do exercise 3, …………………………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Period 62: Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 31 /12/2012 date: 2/1/2013 date: 2/11/2013 date: 2/11/2013 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: UNIT TEN: STAYING HEALTHY Section B: Food and drink Lesson 4: B1,B2,B3 I.Objectives: 1.Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know about some food and drink They can practice with "some and any" 2.Skills: Practice skills 3.Attitude: -Work hard iI.Language contents: Vocabulary: apple, orange, banana, water, rice, milk, meat, vegetables Grammar: + What is for lunch? + Is/ Are there any …… ? - Yes/ No, ………………………… III.Teaching aids: T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,sub board - Ss: pens, text book, notebook IV.Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre -lesson Call some ss go to the board ex 3,4 in work book Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor asnwers + What's the date? + How are you? - Students play in * Check old lesson: minutes - Let students play game "Jumbled words - matter - thirsty I New words: - metatr - histrty - noodles - feel - Apple (n): táo - noldoes - fele - hungry - cold - Orange (n): cam - nughyr - olcd - Bananas (n): chuối - Water (n): nước Presentation: - Students look at the - Rice (n0: gạo - Ask students look at the pictures and guess the - Milk (n): sữa pictures and guess new new words - Meat (n): thịt words - It's "quả táo/ cam/ - Vegetables (n): rau + What is it? chuối/ nước/ " - For (pre): cho, vì, … - Listen and write - Fruit (n): hoa - Explain the new words down - Read in chorus II The dialogue: - Read after me - Some students read * Model sentences: + Who can read? - Listen to the tape + What's for lunch? - Listen to the tape, please - Some students read - There is some meat and + Who can read again? again some rice - Work in pairs + Is there any fruit? + Who can ask and asnwer? - Yes/ No, …………… + What would like? + Are there any noodles? 3, Comprehension check: - Listen to the teacher - Yes/ No, …………… - Introduce the dialogue - Listen to the tape - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) - Work in pairs + Who can read the dialogue? - Listen to the teacher - Explain the model and write down sentences + What' s for lunch? - There is some meat and some rice + Who can remark the way using "some and any"? + Who can ask and asnwer? - Ask students answer some questions a, What's for lunch? b, Are there any oranges and some bananas? c, Is there any water? d, Are there any noodles? e, What's there to drink? + Who can ask and answer? 4, Practice: - Ask students to practice with: "Is / Are there any ………?" - Yes/ No, …………… - Let students play game "Noughts and crosses" III Practice: Answer key a, There is some meat and - Some students remark some rice - Work in pairs b, Yes There are some oranges and some bananas c, Yes There is some water d, No There aren't any - Students in noodles minutes e, There is some water * Game: "Noughts and crosses" - Practice in pairs - Practice in pairs bananas water vegetables orange meat rice milk apple noodles - Play game in minutes - Students repeat bananas water vegetables orange meat rice - Write down milk apple noodles 4.Consolidation:- New words - Model sentences: + What's for lunch? + Is/ Are there any ……….? - Yes/ No, ……………… Homework: - Learn by heart new words and model sentences - Do exercise 1,2 ………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date Teaching date Teaching date Preparetion date period: Class: 6A period: Class: 6B period: Class: 6C 31 /12/2012 date: 2/1/2013 date: 2/11/2013 date: 2/11/2013 Period 63: Unit ten: Staying healthy Section B: Food and drink Lesson 5: B4,B5 total : 25 out: total : 24 out: total : 26 out: I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson,Sts will be able to Skills: Practice skills Attitude: -Help sts to know about some food and drink They can practice with "some and any" - Work hard II language contents: 1, Vocabulary: fish, chicken, bread, rice, fruit, …………… 2, Grammar: + What would you like? + I' d like some rice and some meat III Teaching aids: T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,sub board - Ss: pens, text book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre -lesson Call some ss go to the board ex 1,2 work book Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Bingo" with the words: meat, banana, rice, milk, apple, water, orange 2, Presentation: - Ask students look at the pictures and guess new words + What is it? - Explain the new words - Read after me + Who can read? - Let students play game "Matching" fish a c¬m bread b níc cam chicken c c¸ Sts' activities - The monitor asnwers Contents Unit 10: Staying healthy Period 63 B Food and drink (B ,B5) - Students play in minutes I New words: - Students look at the - Fish (n): c¸ pictures and guess the - Chicken (n): thÞt gµ new words - Rice (n): c¬m - It's "thực đơn/ cá/ thịt - Fruit (n): hoa gµ/ hoa qu¶/ " - Menu (n): thực đơn - Listen and write down * Play game "Matching" - Read in chorus - Some students read fish a c¬m bread b níc cam chicken c c¸ - Students play in rice d b¸nh m× minutes orange e gµ rice d b¸nh m× orange e gµ - Give answer key - Check again 3, Comprehension check: - Introduce the dialogue - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the tape - Listen to the tape, please - Work in pairs (3 times) + Who can read the dialogue? - Ask students make the - Practice in pairs similar dialogues A: I/ hot I/ like/ cold drink What/ you/ like? B: I/ not hot/ I/ hungry/ I/ like/ bread + Who can ask and answer? - Look at the pictures 4, Practice: - Some students repeat - Ask students look at the the words pictures in B5 - Listen to the teacher + Who can repeat the words - Listen to the tape and in the pictures? match the names of the - Introduce the listening people with what they' d like - Listen to the tape, please - He' d like some (3 times) chicken and some rice - Work in pairs + What would Nhan like? - Check again - Practice in pairs + Who can ask and answer about Nhan/ Tuan/ Huong/ Mai? - Give answer key - Students repeat - Ask students practice with their partners 4.Consolidation: - New words What would you like? - I' dlike ……………… II The dialogue: A: I' m hot I' d like a cold drink What would you like? B: I'm not hot I' m hungry I'd like a bread III Practice: * Listening Answer key Nhan: c, f Tuan: a, d Huong: e, g Mai: b, h + What would Nhan like? - He' d like some chicken and some rice Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Do exercise 3, Period 64: Unit ten: Staying healthy Section C: My favorite food Lesson 6: C1,2,3 &4 I.Objectives: By the end the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to know about some food and drink and talk about their favorite food or drink -Work hard II language contents: 1, Vocabulary: carrot, tomatoe, lettuce, potatoe, bean, peas, cabbage, onion, lemonade, iced tea, iced coffee, soda, …………… 2, Grammar: + What's your favorite food? + I like fish + Do you like carrots? - Yes/ No, ……… III Teaching aids: -T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,sub board -Ss: text book, notebook,pens IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre -lesson Call some ss go to the board ex 3,4 work book Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call students go to the board and exercises Sts' activities - The monitor asnwers S1: does ex 3/ 90 Contents Unit 10: Staying healthy Period 64: C My favorite food I New words: - Carrot (n): cµ rèt S2: does ex 4/ 90 - Tomatoe (n): cµ chua - Lettuce (n): rau xµ l¸ch 2, Presentation: - Show and students look at - Look at the pictures - Potatoe (n0: khoai t©y the pictures and guess new and guess the meaning - Bean (n): qu¶ ®Ëu - Peas (n): h¹t ®Ëu words of new words - Cabbage (n): b¾p c¶i - cµ rèt, cµ chua, rau + What is it? - Explain the new words - Read after me + Who can read? - Listen to the tape (2 times) + Who can read the example? 3, Comprehension check: - Introduce the dialogue - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can read the dialogue? - Explain the model sentences + What' s your favorite food? - I like some fish + Do you like chicken? - Yes, I do./ No, I don't 4, Practice: - Ask students practice in pairs + Do you like cold drink? - Yes, I + What you like? - I like iced tea It's my favorite drink + Who can ask and asnwer? - Let students play game "Jumbled words" a, manodele b, ecid ocefef c, cgeabab d, onion e, teltuce + Who can give the right words? - Give answer key xµ l¸ch, khoai t©y,… - Listen and repeat Write down - Read in chorus - Some students read - Listen to the tape - Onion (n): hµnh - Lemonade (n): níc chanh - Iced tea (n): trà đá - Iced coffee (n): cà phê đá - Soda (n): níc ngät - Favorite (adj): u thÝch - Work in pairs II The dialogue: - Listen to the teacher * Model sentences - Listen to the tape + What' s your favorite food? - I like fish - Work in pairs + Do you like vegetables? - Yes, I do./ No, I don't - Listen to the teacher and write down - Practice in pairs - Practice in pairs - Work in pairs - Students play game in minutes - Some students give the right words - Check again III Practice: + Do you like cold drink? - Yes, I + What you like? - I like iced tea It's my favorite drink * Play game: "Jumbled words " a, lemonade b, iced coffee c, cabbage d, onion e, lettuce 4.Consolidation: + Who can repeat the main contents of the lesson - New words + What's your favorite food? - I like ……………… - It's my favorite ……… Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Do exercise 1, 2, 3, 4, ………………………………………………………………… Period 65: Unit eleven: What you eat? Section A: At the store Lesson 1: A1 I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: - Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to socialize while go shopping -Work hard II language contents: 1, Vocabulary: box, can, bar, toothpaste, chocolate, packet, dozen, tube, bottle, egg, gram, kilo, soap, cooking oil, …………… 2, Grammar: + Can I help you? - Yes III Teaching aids: -T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,sub board -Ss: text book, notebook,pens IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call students go to the board and exercises 2, Presentation: - Show the pictures - Ask students look at the pictures and guess the new Sts' activities - The monitor asnwers S1: does ex (a, d, e)/ 91 S2: does ex (a, b, c, d)/ 92 Contents Unit 11: What you eat? Period 65: A At the store A1 I New words: - A bottle (n): chai, lä - Cooking oil (n): dÇu ¨n - Packet (n): gãi - Tea (n): trµ - Box (n): hép - Look at the pictures - Chocolate (n): s« c« la - Listen to the teacher - A kilo (n): kil« words + What is it? - Explain the new words - Read after me + Who can read? 3, Comprehension check: - Introduce the dialogue - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can read the dialogue? - Explain the model sentences + Can I help you? - Yes, a bottle of cooking oil - Here you are - Thank you - Let students play game "Matching" a bottle of toothpaste a dozen orange a box of beef a tube of water a kilo of tea a packet of chocolate - "chai dÇu ¨n, hép trµ, gãi, ………… " - Listen and write - Read in chorus - Some students read - Gram (n): gam - Beef (n): thÞt bß - A dozen (n): t¸ - Eggs (n): trøng - Can (n): lon, hép - Bar (n): b¸nh, thanh, thái - Soap (n): xµ phßng - Tube (n): tuýp - Listen to the teacher - Toothpaste (n): kem đánh - Listen to the tape - Help (v): giúp đỡ - Here you are: cña b¹n ®©y - Work in pairs II The dialogue: * Model sentences - Listen and write + Can I help you? down - Yes, a bottle of cooking oil + Here you are - Thank you * Note: Khi muèn kÕt hîp c¸c tõ chØ vËt chøa, khèi lîng, träng lợng, các đơn vị đong, đo , đếm với các danh từ khác, ta để các từ đơn vị đứng tr- Students play game ớc và nối với các danh từ khác = in minutes giíi tõ "of", trõ trêng hîp "dozen" * Game: Matching a bottle of toothpaste a dozen orange a box of beef a tube of water - Work in pairs a kilo of tea a packet of chocolate 4, Practice: - Ask students make the similar dialogue and practice - Students play game in pairs in minutes - Let students play game "Noughts and crosses" chocolat a bottle a kilo e tea peas a box a dozen toothpas rice te Example: - I' dlike a bottle of cooking oil - Write the example III Practice: + Can I help you? - Yes, a box of chocolate, please + Here you are - Thank you * Play game: "Noughts and crosses " chocolat a bottle a kilo e tea peas a box a dozen toothpas rice - Students repeat te Example: - I' dlike a bottle of cooking oil - I want a kilo of oranges - I want a kilo of oranges 4.Consolidation:- New words + Can I help you? - A packet of tea Homework:- Learn by heart new words - Do exercise 1, ………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 66: Unit eleven: What you eat? Section A: At the store Lesson 2: A2,3 I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to -Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: - Help sts to socialize while go shopping Ask and answer about quantity, using "How much/ How many …?" - Work hard II language contents: 1, Vocabulary: review the words, …………… 2, Grammar: + How much you want? + How many you want? III Teaching aids: T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape, subboard Ss: pens, text book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson Call some ss go to the board ex 1,2 work book Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call students go to the board and exercises - The monitor asnwers S1: does ex (cét 1) / 93 S2: does ex (c«t 2) / 93 Unit 11: What you eat? Period 66: A At the store A 2,3 I The dialogue: * Model sentences + How much beef you want? 2, Presentation: - Two hundred grams - Show the pictures - Look at the pictures + How many eggs you want? - Explain the dialogue - Listen to the teacher - A dozen + Who can repeat the - Some students question about quantity? repeat III Practice: - Explain about countnouns - Listen to the teacher Asnwer key and uncountnouns And the and write down a, Ba is at the store way to use "How much/ How many?" - I want two bottles of b, He wants some beef and eggs c, He wants 200 grams of beef + How much water you water d, He wants a dozen eggs want? - I want ten eggs + How many eggs you want? 3, Comprehension check: - Introduce the dialogue - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can read the dialogue? - Explain the model sentences + How much beef you want? - Two hundred grams + How many eggs you want? - A dozen - Let students answer the questions in study card + Who can ask and answer? - Give answer key - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - Listen to the teacher milk soda eggs carrots oranges rice water fish beef Example: - I want bottles of milk - I want kilos of oranges - Students study card in minutes - Work in pairs - Check again - Practice in freely 4, Practice: + Who can ask and answer with each other? - Let students play game * Play game: "Noughts and crosses " - Students play game "Noughts and crosses" milk soda eggs carrots oranges rice water fish beef 4.Consolidation:- New words + How much/ How many? Homework:- Learn by heart new words - Do exercise 3, ………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 67: unit eleven: What you eat? Section A: At the store Lesson 3: A4 I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude:- Help sts to socialize while go shopping Ask and answer about quantity, using "How much/ How many …?" -Work hard II.language contents: 1, Vocabulary: review the words, …………… 2, Grammar: + How much you want? + How many you want? III Teaching aids: T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,sub board Ss: pens, text book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson Call some ss go to the board ex 3,4work book Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: Sts' activities Contents + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Jumbled words": ospa ceri aspe tobtle betu tecolacho ogeran 2, Presentation: - Show the pictures + What's this in the picture a/ b/ c/ d/ e? - Listen to the tape Then match the names of the people with the things they want (3 times) + Who can ask and answer about Phuong/ Ly/ Mai/ Nam? - Give answer key - The monitor asnwers Unit 11: What you eat? Period 67: A At the store A4 - Students play game soap rice peas botle tube chocolate orange - Look at the pictures - This is a box of chocolate/ a can of coco cola/ …… - Listen to the tape and match - Work in pairs I Listen: + What does Phuong want? - He wants a tube of toothpaste + What does Ly want? - She wants a bar of soap and a box of chocolates + What does Mai want? - She wants a can of soda + What does Nam want? - He wants a packet of cookies - Check again II The dialogue: 3, Comprehension check: - Introduce the dialogue - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can read the dialogue? + What does Nam's mother need? + How much rice does she want? + What does she need? + How many oranges does she need? 4, Practice: - Give students study card: Put the sentences in the correct order a, How much rice you - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - She needs a bottle of cooking oil and some rice … - She wants two kilos - She needs half a kilo of beef and some oranges - She needs half a dozen - Students study card in minutes III Practice: Answer key g, Can you go to the store for me? e, Yes, Mom What you need? f, A bottle fo cooking oil and some rice a, How much rice you want? d, Two kilos And I need half a kilo of beef and some oranges c, How many oranges, Mom? b, Half a dozen, please want? b, Half a dozen, please c, How many oranges, Mom? d, Two kilos And I need half a kilo of beef and some oranges e, Yes, Mom What you need? f, A bottle of cooking oil and some rice g, Can you go to the store - Practice in pairs for me? + Who can complete the - Check again dialogue? - Give answer key 4.Consolidation: + Who can repeat the main contents of the lesson.+ How much/ How many?5.Homework:- Do exercises Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 68: Unit eleven: What you eat? Section B: At the canteen Lesson 4: B1,2 I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to know more about the food, fruit and drink -Work hard II language contents: 1, Vocabulary: review the words, … 2, Grammar: + Can I help you? + How much …….? III Teaching aids: T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape, subboard Ss: pens, : text book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson Call some ss go to the board ex 5work book Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Slap the board": noodle, soap, fish, milk, chicken, vegetables, peas, cabbage, beef 2, Presentation: - Show the pictures and ask students to ask and answer + What is this? + What are they? - Let students write the words of the pictures + Who can read the words again? 3, Comprehension check: - Introduce the dialogue - Listen to the tape, please (3 times) + Who can read the dialogue? 4, Practice: - Ask students to make the similar dialogue + Who can ask and answer? - Give students study card: Use the given words to make the dialogues a, a bowl of noodle/ a glass of orange juice/ 7,500 d b, a banana/ an ice-cream/ 4,000 d + Who can ask and answer? Sts' activities - The monitor asnwers - Students play game - Look at the pictures - Work in paris - Students write - Some students read again - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - Students make the dialogue - Practice in pair - Students study card in minutes - Practice in pairs Contents Unit 11: What you eat? Period 68: B At the canteen B1, I Write the words: a, rice g, oranges b, noodle h, bananas c, beef i, orange juice d, chicken j, milk e, fish k, soda f, vegetables l, water II The dialogue: + Can I help you? - Yes I'd like a sandwich and a glass of lemon juice, please + Here you are - Thanks How much are they? - Two thousand five hundred dong… Thank you III Practice: a, + Can I help you? - Yes I'd like a bowl of noodle and a glass of orange juice, please + Here you are - Thanks How much are they? + Seven thousand five hundred dong b, + Can I help you? - Yes I'd like a banana and an ice- cream + Here you are - Thanks How much are they? + Four thousand dong 4.Consolidation: + Can I help you? + How much? Homework: - Do exercises 1, ……………………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 69: Unit eleven: What you eat? Section B: At the canteen Lesson 5: B3,4 &5 I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to practice ask and answer about the price: How much? - Work hard II language contents: 1, Vocabulary: review the words, …………… 2, Grammar: + How much …….? III Teaching aids: T: text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape, sub board Ss: pens , text book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson Call some ss go to the board ex 1,2 work book Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? Sts' activities - The monitor asnwers Contents Unit 11: What you eat? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Network": - Students play game rice orange apples a kilo of cheese 2, Presentation: - Ask students to practice: + What would you like for breakfast? - Look at the pictures in B1 and number the pictures as you hear - Let students play game "Lucky number" - Listen to the tape and number the pictures as you hear (3 times) + Who can give the words of pictures as you hear? - Give answer key beef - Work in pairs - Students play game - Listen to the tape and number the pictures - Some students give their answers - Check again - Look at the menu - Practice in pairs 3, Comprehension check: - Look at the menu + Who can ask and answer the price the items? 4, Practice: - Students study card - Give students study card: in minutes Make the questions and answer a, kilo of sugar/ 6,500 d b, a dozen eggs/ 10,000 d c, a tube of toothpaste/ 8,000 d - Work in pairs d, a bowl of noodle/ 5,000d e, oranges/ 5,000 d + Who can ask and answer? Period 69: B At the canteen B -5 I Practice: + What would you like for breakfast/ lunch/ dinner? - I'd like ……………… II Listen: Answer key e, fish f, vegetables b, noodles j, milk i, orange juice h, bananas c, beef l, water * Play game: "Lucky numbers" What would you like for breakfast? Lucky number What would like for lunch? Lucky number §Æt c©u hái vÒ sè lîng víi tõ "rice" Lucky number §Æt c©u hái vÒ sè lîng víi tõ "oranges" What would you like for dinner? How much beef you need? 10 How many eggs you want? III Practice: + How much is a fried rice? - It's 2,500 d Answer key a, + How much is a kilo of sugar? - It's 6,500 d b, + How much is a dozen eggs? - It's 10,000 d c, + How much is a tube of toothpaste? - It's 8,000 d d, + How much is a bowl of noodles? - It's 5,000 d e, + How much are oranges? - They are 5,000 d 4.Consolidation:+ What would you like for breakfast/ lunch/ dinner? + How much? Homework:- Do exercises 3, …………………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 70: Grammar practic I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: - Help sts to review some structures that they have learnt Then some exercises -Work hard II language contents: 1, Vocabulary: review the words, …………… 2, Grammar: - Simple/ progressive present tenses - A, an, some, any/ Adjectives - Question words III Teaching aids: T: Text book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape, sub board Ss: pens, text book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson Call some ss go to the board ex 3,4 work book Correct and give mark 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call students go to the board and exercises - The monitor asnwers Period 70: Grammar practice I Grammar: S1: does ex (a, b, c) Present simple tense * Form: S2: does ex 4/ 96 S + V/ V-s,-es + O S + don't/ doesn't + V + O Do/Does + S + V + O ? - I play football every day - Some students - He doesn't play football repeat - Do they play football? a, an, some, any - a, an: dïng víi danh tõ dÕm ®- Some students make îc ë sè Ýt sentences - some: dïng víi c¶ lo¹i danh tõ - Listen to the teacher ë sè nhiÒu then make sentences - any: dùng với DT không đếm - Students repeat đợc, DT đếm đợc số nhiều câu phủ định và nghi vÊn - Students repeat Adjectives: tall/ short/ thin/ fat/ light/ strong/ - Work in pairs weak/ …… Question words Who/ Where/ When/ Why/ - Students exercise How/ Which/ What Present progressive tense S + am/is/ are + V-ing + O - Work in pairs 2, Presentation: * Grammar + Who can repeat the present simple tense? + Who can make sentences? + Who can repeat the progressive tense? + Who can make sentences? - Repeat "a/ an/ some/ any" + Who can make sentences? + Who can repeat the adjectives you have learnt? + Who can make sentences? + Who can repeat the question words? + Who can ask and answer? 3, Practice: * Exercise 1: a, like + Do you like noodles? - Yes I like noodles + Do you like rice? - No I don't like rice b, + Does she like chicken? - Yes She likes chicken + Does she like fish? - No She doesn't like fish * Exercise 2: - Students exrecise a, + Do you have some bananas - No I don't have any - Work in pairs bananas, but I have some oranges - I would like an orange, please b, + Do we have some drinks? - There is some fruit juice on II Exercises: * Exrecise 1: a, like/ like/ Do/ like/ I don't like b, Does/ like/ likes/ Does/ like/ doesn't like * Exercise 2: a, some/ any/ some/ an b, some/ some c, any/ some/ a the table c, + Do we have any soda? - There is some on the shelf in the kitchen + I would like a can of soda * Exrecise 3: a, He isn't tall He is short b, He isn't fat He is thin * Exercise 4: a, Who is in the living room? - Bi and Fifi are in the living room * Exercise 5: a, She eats a lot of fruit - She is eating an apple now b, They drink juice - They are drinking some juice at the moment - Some students give their answers * Exercise 3: a, short b, thin c, light d, strong e, thirsty f, cold g, thin h, long - Work in pairs - Some students read their sentences * Exercise 4: a, Who d, What b, What e, Where c, How * Exercise 5: a, is eating d, is going b, are drinking e, is getting c, is riding f, is traveling 4.Consolidation:- Present simple/ progressive tenses - a, an, some./ Adjectives/ Question words Homework:- Do "Test yourself" ………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 71: Written test - 45' I.objectives: -By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: Work hard II.language contents: - Grammar: - a, an, some, any + Wh- question ? + Would like … ? III Teaching aids: T: photo tests Ss: pens,ruler IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson 3.New lesson Questions I Choose the best answer What … you like? a, will b, would c, does How many oranges you want? - A ……… , please! a, kilos b, grams c, kilo What … your favorite food? a, b, is c, are …… she like hot drink? a, Does b, Is c, Will Do you like …… ? a, any coffee b, coffee c, some coffee What would you like? - I'd like … a, an apple b, some apple c, apples He feels tired He wants ……… a, going to bed b, to go to bed c, to go to the bed She … long brown hair a, have b, does c, has II Fill a/ an/ some/ any to complete the sentences Do you have … oranges? - No, I have …… bananas He would like …… apple I would like … glass of milk III Put the correct form of the verb in the bracket I (like) … soccer I (play) …… soccer in the school yard now … you (like) … soda? I and Hoa (drink) … soda at the moment IV Make questions for the underlined words A pen is 2,000 dong I want a dozen oranges V Read the passage Then answer the questions Answer keys I Marks b - would I marks c - kilo 0,25 x = b - is a - Does a - any coffee a - an apple b - to go to bed c - has II II marks 0,5 x = any/ some an a III III mark 0,25 x = 1 like/ am playing IV mark Would … like/ are drinking IV How much is a pen? How many oranges you want? V They both work in offices 0,5 x = V 2marks 0,5 x = in London My name is Thu and this is my husband, Hung We both work in offices in London We have breakfast at half past seven For lunch we usually have a salad or soup We go home at five o'clock We usually have dinner at half past seven in the evening We have meat or fish with vegetables and potatoes or rice We have orange juice with the milk Where Thu and her husband work? What they have for lunch? What time they usually have dinner? What they drink for dinner? VI Listen and answer the questions What would Nam like for breakfast? What would Nam like for lunch? They have a salad or soup for lunch They have dinner at half past seven in the evening They drink orange juice with VI milk for dinner 2marks 1x2=2 VI Nam would like a sandwich and a glass of milk for breakfast Nam would like some rice, fish and vegetables for lunch …………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 72: Correct the written test - 45' I.objectives: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to -Skills: - Help sts to correct the mistakes in their tests -Do exercises -Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: -Vocabulary & Grammar : Contents of the tests III.teaching aids: -T: text book, plan, work book -Ss: text books, notebook, pens IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre - lesson (no check) 3.New lesson Mistakes Answer keys Mark I B - would C - kilo B - is A - Does A - any coffee A - an apple B - to go to bed C has II II Em h·y chän tõ thÝch hîp… any/ some an a some / a any/ some III like/ am playing III Em hãy điền dạng đúng Do/ like/ are drinking …… IV playing How much is a pen? drink/ drinking How many oranges you IV §Æt c©u hái cho tõ g¹ch ch©n want? What is a pen? V How much a pen? They both work in offices How many you want? in London V §äc vµ tr¶ tlêi c©u hái They usually have a salad Thu and this is my husband, Hung or soup for lunch They for lunch usually have a They usually have dinner at salad or soup half past seven in the evening They drink orange juice with the milk VI Listen VI He'd like a bread and a I'd like …… glass of milk foe breakfast I'd like …………… He'd like some rice, fish and vegetables for lunch I Choose the best answer c - are c - some coffee b - some apple c - to go to the bed a - have I marks 0,25 x = II marks 0,5 x = III mark 0,25 x = IV mark 0,5 x = V marks 0,5 x = VI marks 2X1=2 ……………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 73: Unit twelve: Sports and pastimes Section A: What are they doing? Lesson 1: A1,2 I.Objective: By the end of the lesson,student will be able to - Skills: Practice skills -Attitude: -Help sts to know about the names of sports in English -Work hard II.language contents: 1, Vocabulary: swim, skip, jog, table tennis, badminton, volleyball, aerobics, 2, Grammar: + What is she/ he doing now? - She/ he is doing …… III Teaching aids: -T: - book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss;- book, notebook , pen IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre - lesson (no check) 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Ask some questions: + What are you doing now? Sts' activities - The monitor asnwers - Answer: - I'm listening to you - I am sitting - She is reading - He is writing Contents Unit 12: Sports and pastimes Period 73: A What are they doing? (A 1, ) I Listen and read: New words: + What is she/ he doing - Swim (v): b¬i now? - Badminton (n): cÇu l«ng - Soccer (n): bóng đá 2, Presentation: - Skip (v): nh¶y d©y - Show the pictures and ask : - Look at the pictures - Volleyball (n): bãng chuyÒn + What are they doing? - They are playing - Aerobics (n): thÓ dôc nhÞp sports ®iÖu - Explain the meaning of - Listen and write - Table tennis (n): bãng bµn new words down - Jog (v): ®i bé thÓ dôc - Read after me! - Read in chorus Model sentences: + Who can read? - Read in individual + What are you doing now? - Listen to the tape, please - Listen to the tape - I am ……… (2 times) + What is he doing now? + Who can read? - Work in pairs - He is swimming now - Let students play game - Students play game "Matching" with pictures + Who can read the word - Some students read and match? + True or false? 3, Comprehension check: + Who can repeat the present progressive tense? - Look at the pictures and practice, please + Who can ask and answer? 4, Practice: - Explain the part 2/ 125 + What is he/ she doing? + What are they doing? and match with the pictures - Remark - Some students repeat - Look at the pictures and work in pairs - Listen to the teacher - He is swimming - They are playing badminton - Let students play game "Noughts and crosses" Lan/ I/ table We/ not - Students play game skipping tennis swim Hoa/ Which/ they/ aerobics you/ soccer play Hung/ your your jogging brother sister soccer II Practice: + What are they doing? - They are playing badminton + What is she doing? - She is doing aerobics * Play game: "Noughts and crosses" Lan is skipping I am playing table tennis We aren't swimming Hoa is doing aerobics - Students make + Who can make sentences? sentences - Practice in pairs + Who can practice about you? 4.Consolidation: - The present progressive tense - The names of sports Homework: - Learn by heart the new words - Do exercises 1, 2/ 103 ……………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 74: Unit twelve: Sports and pastimes Section A: What are they doing? Lesson A : A3 -6 I.Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to -Skills: Practice skills -Attitude: -Help sts to speak and write about sports which they play -Ask and answer about sports -Work hard II.language contents: Vocabulary: Review all the words about sports Grammar: + Which sports you play? + Which sports does he/ she play III Teaching aids: -T:- book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss:- book, pens, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call sts go to the board exercises 1, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Matching": Skipping Table tennis Swimming Jogging Sts' activities - The monitor asnwers Contents Unit 12: Sports and pastimes Period 74: A What are they doing? (A -> 6) - Students matching the names of the right I Listen and repeat: pictures + Which sports you play? - I play ………… Soccer Aerobics + Which sports does he/ she play? 2, Presentation: - He/ She plays ……… - Introduce the lesson - Listen to the teacher * Practice - Look at the pictures - Look at the pictures + Which sports you play? - I play table tennis + Which sports does he - He plays soccer II The text: play? * Game: "Lucky numbers" - Listen to the tape and - Read in chorus Answer key repeat a, Which sports does Lan play? + Who can read? - Work in pairs - She swims, she does aerobics + Who can ask and answer? - Practice in pairs and she plays badminton - Introduce the text in part - Listen to the teacher b, Does Lan play tennis? - Listen to the tape, please - Listen to the tape - No, she doesn't (2 times) c, Which sports does Nam play? + Who can read the text? - Some students read - He plays soccer, he jogs and he + Does lan like sports? - Yes, she does plays table tennis + Which sports does she - She swims, does d, Does Nam play table tennis? like? aerobics and she - Yes, he does plays badminton 3, Comprehension check: - Let students play games "Lucky numbers" 10 - Students play game * Lucky numbers: 1, 5, 8, 9, 10 - Give answer key - Check again 4, Practice: * Write a, Ask your partners: Which sports you play? Write their answers in your exercise book - Ask students look at the pictures and practice in pairs b, Now write about the sports you play - Call student go to the board and write The others write in the study card - Practice in pairs III Practice: * Write a, Ask your partners: + Which sports you play? Write their answers in your exercise book b, Now write about the sports you play - One student writes on the board and the others write in study (in minutes) + Who can read your passage? - Remark - Remark the passage on the board card in minutes - Some students read their passages - Listen to the teacher 4.Consolidation: + Which sports you play? - I play soccer + Which sports does she play? - She does aerobics - The names of the sports (Play "Guessing game") Homework: - Write about the sports you play - Do exercises 3, 4/ 104 - Prepare part B …………………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 75: Unit twelve: Sports and pastimes Section B: Free time Lesson3: B1,2,3,4,5 I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills -Attitude: -Help sts to ask and answer about the pastimes in free time They can write and speak about their activities in their free time -Work hard II language contents: 1, Vocabulary: fishing, free time, once, twice, three times, ……… 2, Grammar: + What you in your free time? - I play table tennis + How often you play sports? - I play sports twice a week III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: book, notebook, pens IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call sts go to the board exercises 3, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Net work": 2, Presentation: - Introduce the lesson - Look at the pictures and listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can find out the new words? - Explain the meaning + Who can read? + When does Phuong go to the cinema? + What does Ly in her free time? + Who can ask and answer about these people/ your partners? 3, Comprehension check: - Listen to the tape, please (B3 - times) + Who can read? + Who can ask answer about these people? * Listen + What activities is in picture a/ b/ c/ d/ e/ f? - Now, you listen to the tape and match the names with the right pictures (2 times) + What does Tan in his Sts' activities Contents - The monitor asnwers - Students play game Unit 12: Sports and pastimes Period 75: B Free time Sports B1-5 I Listen and repeat: - Listen to the teacher + What you in your free time? - Look at the pictures, listen to the - I play soccer tape and repeat - Students find out new words - Listen and write down - Some students read New words: - Go fishing (v): ®i c©u c¸ - She goes to the cinema in the Read evening Example: + What does Phuong in his - Work in pairs free time? - He goes to the movies Listen: Answer key Minh and Nam - e - Some students read Tan - f Lien - a Lan and Mai - b - Work in pairs - Listen to the tape - Watch TV/ Listen to the radio/ ……… - Listen to the tape and match the names with the right pictures II The dialogue: New words: - He reads books free time? + Who can ask answer? - Give answer key * The dialogue - Explaining of new words - Read after me + Who can read? - Introduce the lesson - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read? - Explain the question "How often … ?" + How often does Ly go to school? - She goes to school six times a week + Who can ask and answer? 4, Practice: - Ask students ask about theirs partners + Who can ask and answer? + Do you like jogging Lan? + Which sports you play? + How often you play it? - Work in pairs - Check again - Listen and write - Read in chorus - Some students read - Once (adv): lÇn - Twice (adv): lÇn - Three times (adv): lÇn + How often you go fishing? - I go fishing twice a week + How often does Ly go jogging? - She goes jogging once a week - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - Listen and write - She goes to school six times a week - Work in pairs P1: Do you like play soccer Nam? P2: Yes, I P1: How often you play it? P2: Three times a week III Practice: + How often does Ly play badminton? - She plays badminton three times a week + How often you go swimming? - I go swimming once a week 4.Consolidation: + What you in your free time? - I play soccer + How often you play it? - I play it twice a week Homework: - Write your activities in free time - Do exercises 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/ 105 ……………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:………………….…………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 76: Unit twelve: Sports and pastimes Section C: How often? Lesson4: C 1,2,3 I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to -Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to use the adverbs of frequency with the question "How often?" -Work hard II language contents: 1, Vocabulary: always, usually, often, sometimes, never, picnic, fly, kite, camp, tent, ……… 2, Grammar: - I usually go fishing - She never goes fishing III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call sts go to the board exercises 1, 2, 3, 4, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students exercise: Make the questions for answers a, Yes, he does b, He goes fishing twice a week c, He plays soccer at the weekend 2, Presentation: - Introduce the lesson - Look at the pictures and listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can guess the meaning of the adv? - Explain the meaning Sts' activities - The monitor asnwers Contents Unit 12: Sports and pastimes Period 76: C How often? C -> I Listen and repeat: * New words: - Students - Always (adv): lu«n lu«n exercise in minutes - Usually (adv): thêng xuyªn - Often (adv): thêng - Sometimes (adv): thØng tho¶ng - Never (adv): kh«ng bao giê II The text: New words: - Listen to the teacher - Picnic (n): buæi d· ngo¹i - Look at the - Fly (v): bay, th¶ pictures, listen to the - Kite (n): diÒu tape and repeat - Camp (v): c¾m tr¹i - Go camping (v): ®i c¾m tr¹i - Students guess - Tent (n): lÒu, tr¹i Model sentences: + Who can read? 3, Comprehension check: - Introduce the text - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can find out the new words? - Explain the meaning + Who can read? + Who can read the text? + What Ba and Lan in their free time? + Where they often go? + How they go to school? + Who can ask and answer about Ba and Lan? - Explain the position of adverbs of frequency 4, Practice: - Ask students write sentences about them + Who can ask and answer? - Let students study card a, Nam and Ba/ camping/ never/ go/ have/ they/ don't/ a tent/ because b, often/ to/ park/ go/ the/ they c, you/ help/ do/ your/ mum/ often/ how? + Who can read your sentences? - Give answer key - Listen to teacher + How often go to the park? and write down - I sometimes go to the park - Some students read * Note: Tr¹ng tõ tÇn xuÊt thêng đứng sau động từ "To be", đứng trớc động từ thờng - Listen to the teacher Example: - Listen to the tape - I am always at home in the evening - Students find out - I often go swimmimg the new words - Listen and write down - Some students read - Some students read the text III Practice: - They sometimes go Ask and answer to the zoo,………… + How often Ba and Lan go to - They often go to the the zoo? park - They sometimes go to the zoo - They walk to Write sentences about you school a, How often you go to the - Work in pairs zoo? b, How often you go to the - Listen to the teacher park? and write down c -> g Study card Asnwer key - Students write a, Nam and Ba never go camping sentences about because they don't have a tent them b, They often go to the park - Work in pairs c, How often you help your mum? - Students study card in minutes - Some students read their sentences 4.Consolidation: - Advebs of frequency + How often? Homework: - Learn by heart the new words - Make sentences with the advebs of frequency - Do exercises 1, 2/ 106 Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 77: Unit twelve: Sports and pastimes Section C: How often? Lesson 5: C - I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills -Attitude: -Help sts to continued the adverbs of frequency with the question "How often? -Work hard II language contents: 1, Vocabulary: wear, boots, camping stove, overnight, clothes, take, … 2, Grammar: - Adverbs of frequency + How often? III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens , book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call some sts go to the board exercises 1, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Noughts and crosses" Sts' activities - The monitor answers - Students play game always How often often in minutes sports usually free time jogging sometimes never Contents Unit 12: Sports and pastimes Period 77: C How often? C5-7 I Listen: * Answer key: a, never d, often b, sometimes e, usually c, often II The text: New words: 2, Presentation: - Introduce the listening (Listen and match the suitable advebs of frequency with the right pictures.) - Look at the pictures and listen to the tape, please (3 times) + How often Nga and Lan go camping? + Who can ask and answer? - give answer key 3, Comprehension check: - Introduce the text - Show the pictures and ask students to guess the meaning of new words - Explain the meaning of new words + Who can read? - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read the text? - Wear (v): mÆc - Listen to the teacher - Boots (n): ñng, bèt - Clothes (n): quÇn ¸o - Take (v): mang theo - Camping stove (n): bÕp du - Look at the lÞch pictures, listen to the - Overnight (adv): qua đêm tape and match - They never go camping - Work in pairs - Check again III Practice: - Listen to the teacher Answer the questions - Look at the pictures a, He likes walking and guess new b, They always wear strong boots words and warm clothes c, He always goes at the - Listen to teacher weekend and write down d, He usually goes with his - Some students read friends - Listen to the tape e, He often goes walking in the mountains + Does Minh like walking? - Some students read f, They take food, water and a + What does he often at the text camping stove the weekend? - Yes, he does - He often goes Further practice 4, Practice: walking in the * Complete the passage - Let students study card mountain (question a -> f) Minh likes walking He often + Who can ask and answer? - Students study walks in the mountain He - Give answer key card in minutes usually goes with his friends * Further practice - Work in pairs They always wear warm clothes Complete the passage - Check again and strong boots They always Minh likes (1) … He take food, water and a camping often (2) … in the (3) … stove He usually goes with his - Students sudy friends They always (4) … card in minutes warm clothes and (5) … (6) … They always take (7) …, water and a (8) … stove + Who can read your passage? - Give answer key - Some students read their passage - Check again 4.Consolidation: - Advebs of frequency + How often? Homework:- Learn by heart the new words - Do exercises 3, 4/ 107 ………………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 78: Unit thirteen: Activities and the seasons Section A: The weather and seasons Lesson1: A 1, I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to describe and ask/ answer about the weather in each season - Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: season, weather, spring, summer, autumn, fall, winter 2.Grammar: + What's the weather like? - It's hot/ warm/ cool/ cold III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, : book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson - Call some sts go to the board exercises 3, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? Sts' activities - The monitor answers Contents Unit 13: + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Guessing game" (Call one student go to the - Students play game board and look at the words, in minutes then describe by actions The others guess.) I'm hot I'm cold Activities and the seasons Period 78: The weather and seasons A 1, I Listen and repeat: * New words: - Season (n): mïa - Weather (n): thêi tiÕt - Summer (n): mïa hÌ 2, Presentation: - Winter (n): mùa đông - Introduce the lesson - Listen to the teacher - Spring (n): mïa xu©n - Show the pictures and ask - Look at the pictures - Fall = Autumn (n): mïa thu students to remark and remark Example: - Explain the meaning of - Listen and write - It's hot in the summer new words down Matching game - Read after me - Read in chorus Seasons Weather + Who can read? - Some students read spring hot + How many seasons are - There are four fall cold there in Viet Nam? seasons in Viet Nam summer warm + What are they? - They are …… winter cool - Listen to the tape, please? - Listen to the tape (2 times) + Who can read? - Some students read 3, Comprehension check: - Ask students to play game - Students play game "Matching" Seasons Weather spring hot fall cold summer warm winter cool + Who can match? - Some students II Practice: + True or False? match Example: - Give answer key - Check again + What's the weather like in the summer? 4, Practice: - It's hot - Introduce about asking and - Listen to the * Note: answering the weather teacher - Like: Lµ giíi tõ víi nghÜa + What's the weather like in - Write down "nh" the summer? - It's hot * Students practice freely + Who can ask and answer? - Work in paris (ask and answer about the + How many seasons are - There are four weather) there in Ha Giang? seasons in Ha Giang + What's the weather like in - It's hot Ha Giang in the summer? - Practice in pairs + Who can ask and answer? 4.Consolidation: - New words + What's the weather in the summer/ winter/ fall/ spring? - It's …………… Homework: - Learn by heart the new words - Talk about the weather and seasons in a year - Do exercises 1, 2/ 108 ………………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 79: Unit thirteen: Activities and the seasons Section A: The weather and seasons Lesson2: A I.obiectives: By the end of the lesson,sts will be able to -Skills:- Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to practice talking about the weather in the seasons - Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: season, weather, spring, summer, autumn, fall, winter Grammar: + What weather you like? - I like hot/ warm/ cool/ cold weathe III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board and exercises 1, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? Sts' activities - The monitor Contents + What's the date? answers + How are you? * Check old lesson: P1: does ex 1/ 108 - Call students go to the board and exercises 1, 2/ P2: does ex 2/ 108 108 2, Presentation: - Introduce the lesson - Show the pictures in part A1 and ask: + Is it hot in the winter? + Is it cool in the fall? + Who can ask and answer? + How many seasons are there in a year? + What's the weather like in the spring? - Look at the part A3 - Listen to the tape and repeat, please (2 times) + Who can read? 3, Comprehension check: - Explain the way asking soneone like the weather + What weather you like? - I like warm weather - Now, look at the pictures + Who can ask and answer what weather these people like? 4, Practice: - Ask students practice in groups of four + What's weather like in …? + What weather you like? + Which season you like? + Who can tell what the weather your partner like? - Let students play game "Noughts and crosses" Unit 13: Activities and the seasons Period 79: The weather and seasons A3 I Listen and repeat: - Listen to the teacher - Look at the pictures and answer - No, it isn't - Yes, it is - Work in pairs - There are four seasons in a year - It's warm Example: - I like hot weather * Model sentences: + What weather you like? - I like warm weather - Look at the pictures - Listen to the tape and repeat - Some students read sentences II Practice: * Work in groups: + What's the weather like in ……….? + What weather you like? + Which seasons you like? - Listen to the teacher - Write down and read the example - Look at the pictures * Tell about your partner - Work in pairs Lan likes the winter because she likes cold weather But Tuan doesn't like the winter, he likes the spring and warm weather - Students discuss in groups - Some students tell about their partner * Play game "Noughts and crosses" fall hot summer season spring cold winter weather warm - Students play game fall hot winter summer season weather spring cold warm 4.Consolidation: + What weather you like? - I like …………… Homework: - Talk about the weather you like - Do exercises 3/ 109 ……………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 81: Unit thirteen: Activities and the seasons Section A: The weather and seasons Lesson3: A 4, ************* I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to -Skills:- Practice skills -Attitude: -Help sts to talk what they usually in each weather -Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: review all the words about the weather and sports Grammar: + What you when it's hot? - When it's hot, I …………… + Conjunction "when" III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call some Ss go to the board and exercises 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Crossword" It's the season when your start your new school year It's the time when you can get presents from Santa Claus Tet is in this season You don't go to school at this time of the year 2, Presentation: * Pre- reading: + What you in the summer/ winter/ fall/ spring? - Introduce the question and answer about the things what they in different weather + What you when it is hot/ cold/ warm/ cool? - When it's hot/ warm/ cold/ cool, I ……… - Show the pictures and ask students to guess about Ba 3, Comprehension check: * While- reading: - Look at the book and the pictures - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read? + Who can ask answer about Ba? + Who can tell about the text? 4, Practice: Sts' activities Contents - The monitor answers - Play game Unit 13: Activities and the seasons Period 80: The weather and seasons A 4, I The text: * Model sentences: + What you when it's hot? - I go swimming when it's hot + What does Ba when it's cold? - When it's cold, he plays soccer - I ……………… II Practice: - Listen to the teacher * Work in groups: and write down + What's the weather like in ……….? + What you when it's ……….? - Look at the pictures and guess - Look at the book and pictures - Listen to the tape - Some students read - Work in pairs - Some students tell again the text - Practice in groups in minutes * Survey weath hot er names Lan go for a picni c Nga Hoa Hai col coo war d l m stay at ho me pla y bad ton go out for a wal k - Ask students practice in groups of four (Survey) + What's weather like in …? + What you when it's - Some students talk ………? about their groups + Who can talk about your groups 4.Consolidation: + What you when it's hot? - I …………… Homework: - Talk about the things you in different weather - Do exercises 4/ 110 ………………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 81: Unit thirteen: Activities and the seasons Section B: Activities in seasons Lesson4: B *************** I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to talk about playing sports in the seasons and use the adverbs of frequency - Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: go sailling, basketball, Grammar: - Adverbs of frequency - Model sentences: We often play volleyball in the spring III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board and exercises 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Bingo" with the words: swimming, jogging, badminton, soccer, volleyball, aerobics, tennis, table tennis 2, Presentation: + How many seasons are there in a year? + What are they? + Who can tell about the names of sports? + Who can repeat the adverbs of frequency? + When you often play badminton? - Look at the pictures on the board, please + What activiteies don't you know in this pictures? - Explain the meaning of new words - Read after me + Who can read again? Sts' activities Contents - The monitor answers Unit 13: Activities and the seasons Period 81: B Activities in seasons - Students play game B1 - There are four seasons in a year - They are spring/ … - Some students tell again - Some students repeat: always/ …… - I often play badminton in the … - Look at the pictures - Activity in picture a/ e - Listen and write down - Read in chorus - Some students read I Listen and repeat: New words: - Go sailling (v): chÌo thuyÒn - Basketball (n): bãng ræ - Activity (n): hoạt động Model sentences: - We often play volleyball in the spring II Practice: * Work in pairs: + What you in the - Listen to the tape, summer? - I often play soccer - Some students read + What does Lan in the - Look at the pictures winter? - They often play - She usually go jogging volleyball - Work in pairs 3, Comprehension check: - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read? - Look at the picture a: + What they in the spring? + Who can ask answer? (b -> f) - Now, you ask about your partners? + What you in the …? - I often …… + What does Lan in the - She usually …… * Study card Make sentences, using the given words Answer key … ? - Work in pairs + Who can ask and answer? 4, Practice: - give students study card * Make sentences, using the given words a, He/ play/ soccer/ winter b, We/ go sailling/ fall c, They/ never/ fishing/ winter d, She/ play/ volleyball/ spring e, I/ swimming/ summer - Ask students in minutes + Who can read your sentence a/ b/ c/ d/ e? - Give answer key - Receive study card a, He often plays soccer in the winter b, We usually go sailling in the fall c, They never go fishing in the winter d, She often plays volleyball in the spring e, I always go swimming in the summer - Do in minutes - Some students read their sentences - Check again 4.Consolidation:- New words - Model sentences - Adverbs of frequency Homework:- Do exercises 1, 2/ 110 - Prepare B 2, ………………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 82: Unit thirteen: Activities and the seasons Section B: Activities in seasons Lesson 5: B 2, ************** I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to talk what they usually in each weather Ask and answer about the activities in different seasons - Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: review all the words about the activities and seasons Grammar: + What you in the fall? - In the fall, I go fishing III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board and exercises 1, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents 1, Warm up: Unit 13: + Who's absent today? - The monitor Activities and the seasons + What's the date? answers Period 82: + How are you? B Activities in seasons * Check old lesson: - Chat with the B 2, Chatting teacher + How many seasons are - There are four * Chatting there in a year? seasons in a year + How many seasons are there in + What are they? - They are spring, … a year? + Which season you like - I like ………… + What are they? best? + Which season you like best? + What you usually in - I usually ……… + What you in this season? this season? * Matching 2, Presentation: a, spring c, fall - Let students play game - Students play game b, summer d, winter "Matching" - Show the pictures and - Look at the pictures I Make lists things: words Ask students to and words Study card match the words with the correct pictures Sprin summer Fall Winte a, spring c, fall g r b, summer d, winter …… ……… … …… + Who can match? - Some students give …… ……… … …… their answers - True or false? - True/ False II Make the dialogues - Give answer key - Check again Example: - Ask students to write lists - Listen to the of things they in the teacher Minh: What you in the different seasons spring? - Give students study card - Receive study card Ba: I always ride my bike and ask them to in minutes + Who can read your lists? - Give suggestions and in minutes What you do? - Some students read * Grammar (Review) + What + do/ does + S + + in the (season)? 3, Comprehension check: - S + adv + V-s, -es … - Ask students to use their - Listen to the * Practice: lists and make the dialogues teacher a, they/ usually/ summer + Who can read the - Work in pairs b, you/ sometimes/ spring example? c, they/ sometimes/ fall + Who can ask and answer? - Work in pairs d, Nam/ never/ winter - Review the grammar: - Listen and write + What + do/ does + S + down + in the (season)? - S + adv + V-s, -es + … - Look at the pictures and - Look at the pictures the given words and given words a, they/ usually/ summer b, you/ sometimes/ spring III Write about you c, they/ sometimes/ fall Study card d, Nam/ never/ winter + Who can ask and answer? - Practice in pairs In the spring, I ……… - Remark - Listen * Suggestion: 4, Practice: I like the fall When the weather - Ask students write about - Listen to the teacher is cool, I usually go camping in themselves the mountains with my friends - Give them study card - Receive sutdy card and we take a lot of drinks, food - Ask students study card - One student goes to and fruit sometimes, we play in individual in minutes the board and write basketball - Check some study card (in minutes) + Who can read your writing? - Some students read - Remark their writing - Give suggestion - Listen * Play game "Guessing game" - Let students play game "Guessing game" (Divide class into teams, three ( Divide class into teams, people from each team three people from each team participate in this game One participate in this game One person from each team looks at person from each team looks the pictures, then provides the at the pictures, then provides words which express about these the words which express pictures and the last person write about these pictures and the last person write again the - Students play game again the words The winners are the ones to get more the right words The winners are the in minutes ones to get more the right words) - Remark and award the prize to the winners words) - Listen 4.Consolidation: + What you in the … - I usually ………… Homework: - Do exercises 3/ 113 …………………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 83: Unit fourteen: Making plans SectionA: Vacation destinations Lesson 1: A 1,2,3 ************** I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to listen and understand a short dialogue about intentions for vacation Ask and answer the intentions -Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: vacation, citadel, beach, destination, bay, stay, visit Grammar: - Near future tense: + What are you going to do? - I'm going to visit Hue + Where is he going to stay? - He's going to stay at his friend's house + How long are they going to stay? - They are going to stay in a week III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board and exercises 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game "Pattern puzzle" Example: - toe, ear, eat, …… 2, Presentation: * The dialogue - Introduce the new lesson - Show the pictures and ask some questions: + What you see in the pictures? + Where is it? - Explain the meaning of new words - Read after me + Who can read? 3, Comprehension check: - Listen to the tape, please? (2 times) + Who can read the dialogue? - Explain the new structures "Near future tense" "How long … ?" + What is Lan going to in this summer vacation? + How long is she going to stay there? - Ask students study card in minutes ( a -> d) + Who can ask and asnwer? - Give answer key Sts' activities Contents Unit 14: - The monitor Making plans answers Period 83: A Vacation destinations - Students play game A 1,2, E A R O - Listen to the teacher - Look at the pictures and answer - I see cố đô Huế/ … - Listen and write down - Read in chorus - Read in individual - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - Listen to the teacher and write down - She is going to visit Hue - She is going to stay there for a week - Students study card in minutes - Work in pairs - Check again 4, Practice: - Explain the way how to - Listen to the exercise 3/ 141 I The dialogue: New words: - Vacation (n): kú nghØ - Visit (v): th¨m, viÕng th¨m - Stay (v): ë - Aunt (n): c«, d×, b¸c g¸i - Uncle (n): chó, cËu, b¸c trai - Citadel (n): cố đô, thành - How long? bao l©u - Beach (n): b·i biÓn Grammar: * Near future tense (+) S + am/ is/ are + going to + V-inf + O (-) S + am/ is/ are + not + going to + V-inf + O (?) Am/ Is/Are + S + going to + V-inf + O? * Note: Để diễn tả dự định, kÕ ho¹ch ch¾c ch¾n sÏ x¶y Thêng ®i víi c¸c tõ: tomorrow, next…… Example: - I'm going to play badminton tomorrow afternoon Answer Answer key a, Lan is going to visit Hue b, She is going to stay with her aunt and uncle c, She is going to stay for a week d, She is going to visit the citadel II Practice: * A survey: + What are you going to this summer holiday? + Where are you going to stay? + How long are you going to stay? + What are you going to do? - Ask students to take "A survey." + Who can ask and answer? - Ask students to write the dialogue in their notebooks teacher - I'm going to go to Ha Noi - I'm going to stay with my grandparents - I'm going to stay there for two weeks - I'm going to visit … - Students take a survey - Work in pairs - Write in their notebooks Name Activitie Wher Ho s s e to w stay lon g Nga go to grand a SamSon pa's wee k Hung visit hotel Hue day s Hoa visit Ha hotel Noi wee ks 4.Consolidation:- New words - The dialogue + Grammar: Near future tense Homework:- Learn by heart the words - Read the dialogue again - Make sentences with "Near future tense" - Do exercises 1, 2/ 114 in workbook ……………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 84: Unit fourteen: Making plans SectionA: Vacation destinations Lesson 2: A 4,5, I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to -Skills: - Practice skills -Attitude: -Help sts to ask and answer about their vacations and the others They can write about their vacations -Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: first, then, next, after that, finally, grandmother , grandfather, grandparents, Grammar: - Near future tense: Be going to III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape, plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call some Ss go to the board and exercises 1, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents 1, Warm up: Unit 14: + Who's absent today? - The monitor Making plans + What's the date? answers Period 84: + How are you? A Vacation destinations * Check old lesson: P1: does ex 1/ 114 A 4,5, - Call students go to the board and exercises P2: does ex 2/ 114 I The text: - Remark New words: - First (adv): ®Çu tiªn 2, Presentation: - Then (adv): sau đó * Pre- reading - Next (adv): tiÕp theo - Introduce the text: Phuong - Listen to the - After that (adv): sau đó and Mai are going on teacher - Finally (adv): cuèi cïng vacation this summer, they - Grandmother (n): bµ are going to visit many - Grandfather (n): «ng places - Grandparents (n): «ng bµ - Explain the words: first, - Liste and write Exercise: then, next, after that, finally down "Ordering statements" …… b, They are going to visit Ha - Read after me - Read in chorus Long Bay + Who can read? - Some students read c, They are going to visit Ngoc Son temple 3, Comprehension check: d, They are going to visit Hue for * While- reading days - Listen to the tape, please? - Listen to the tape a, They are going to stay in Nha (2 times) Trang for days + Who can read the text? e, They are going to their + Where are Phuong and - Some students read grandfather in HCM city for a Mai going to go first? - They are going to week + How long are they going visit Ha Long Bay … to stay there? - They are going to II Practice: + Who are they going to stay stay for days Make a table: with? - They are going to - Let students exercise: stay with their aunt Place Where How activity "Ordering statements" a, They are going to stay in Nha Trang for days b, They are going to visit Ha Long Bay c, They are going to visit Ngoc Son temple d, They are going to visit Hue for days e, They are going to their granfather in HCM city for a week + Who can put in the correct order? - Give answer key 4, Practice: * Post- reading - Ask students make a table about the different places Phuong and Mai ……… (in minutes) + Who can ask and asnwer? + Which places are Phuong and Mai going to visit first? + Where are they going to stay? - Look at the table: + Who can tell about Phuong and Mai's vacation? - Students exercise in minutes s Ha long Hano i to stay uncle's house hotel long days days visit the bay see Ngoc Son temple Hue friend's see the house days citadel Nha friend's visit Tran house days friends g HC grands' one visit M house week grands - Some students read their correct sentence - Check again Ask and answer: + Which place are Phuong and Mai going to visit? - They are going to visit Ha Long - Students make a Bay first table …… in + Where are they going to stay? minutes - They are going to stay with their uncle and aunt - Work in pairs - They are going to visit Ha Long Bay … - They are going to stay at their uncle's house - Some students tell 4.Consolidation:- New words - The text + Grammar: Near future tense Homework:- Learn by heart the words - Write a short passage about your vacation - Do exercises 3/ 114 in workbook Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 85: Unit fourteen: Making plans SectionB: Free time plans Lesson 3: B1, 2, I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to talk about their free time plans and write the free time plans - Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: What about you?, Jurassic Park, Grammar: Review: Near future tense "Be going to" III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens , book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson -Ss go to the board and exercises 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor + What's the date? answers Unit 14: + How are you? Making plans * Check old lesson: Period 85: + What are you going to - I'm going to B Free time plans after school? B 1,2, + Where are you going to go - I'm going to go this summer? to + What are you going to - I'm going to I The dialogue: this evening? + What is Lan going to tonight? 2, Presentation: - She is going to her * The dialogue homework - Introduce the dialogue - Listen to the teacher + What is she going to + What you often in - I often tomorrow? your free time? - She is going to visit her friend + What are you going to - I'm going to tonight? * Tell about Tuan: - Explain the phrase: What - Listen to the Tonight, Tuan is going to play about you? teacher badminton Tomorrow, he is - Listen to the tape, please - Listen to the tape going to watch a soccer match (2 times) + Who can read the dialogue? - Let students exercise: True or False? a, Lan is going to watch TV tonight? b, Lan is going to go to the movie tomorrow? c, Tuan isn't going to play badminton tomorrow? d, He is going to play football? + Who can read and check? - Remark - Give answer key 3, Comprehension check: - Ask students to ask and answer about Lan and Tuan + Who can ask and answer? - Now, you use the given words (B2: a, b) to make the dialogues + Who can ask and answer? - Introduce the dialogue (B3) - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read the dialogue? + Is Ba going to play football on the weekend? + Is he going to see a movie? + Which theater is he going to go? - Work in pairs - Students exercise in minutes - Some students read and check - Check again - Practice in pairs - Listen to the teacher - Work in pairs - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - No, he isn't - Yes, he is - He is going to go to Sao Mai movie theater - He is going to see + Which film is he going to "Jurassic Park" see? 4, Practice: + Who can ask and answer about Ba? + Who can tell about Ba's intentions on the weekend? II Make the dialogues: + What are you going to tonight? - I am going to see a movie + What are you going to tomorrow? - I am going to go walking in the park - Work in pairs - Some students tell about Ba III Practice: Ask and answer: + What is Ba going to on the weekend?- He is going to see a movie + Which movie is he going to see? - He is going to see "Jurassic Park" Tell about Ba On the weekend Ba is going to Sao Mai theater to see the film, "Jurassic park" He doesn't know that it is a good film or not 4.Consolidation:- New words - The dialogues + Grammar: Near future tense Homework:- Learn by heart the words - Do exercises 1, 2/ 115 in workbook ……………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 86: Unit fourteen: Making plans Section B: Free time plans Lesson 4: B4,5,6,7 I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to talk about their free time plans and write the free time plans - Work hard II.Language contents: 1, Vocabulary: What about you?, bring, camera, take a photo, …… 2, Grammar: - Review: Near future tense "Be going to" III Teaching aids: -T:book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board and exercises 1, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor + What's the date? answers Unit 14: + How are you? Making plans * Check old lesson: Period 86: B Free time plans - Students play game B -> visit vacation citadel Ngoc Sam Son Ha Son beach temple Long Bay 2, Presentation: + What are you going to - On Saturday, I'm going to visit my on the weekend? grandparents in the countryside - Ask students to tell about - some students tell their plans on the weekend their plans on the weekend + Who can ask and answer? - Work i pairs 3, Comprehension check: * The text - Introduce the text - Show the pictures and ask: + What you see in the pictures? - Explain the new words - Read after me + Who can read? - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read the text? Answer: + What are you going to on the weekend? - On Saturday morning, i'm going to - On Saturday afternoon, I'm going to - On Saturday evening, I'm going to - On Sunday morning, - Listen to the teacher II The text: - Look at the pictures New words: - It's a m¸y ¶nh/ - Bring (v): mang - Camera (n): m¸y ¶nh - Write down - Take a photo (v): chôp ¶nh - Read in chorus - Some students read Ask and answer: - Listen to the tape + What is going to do? - He is going to - Some students read + What are Minh, Nam and the text - They are going to Tuan going to do? have a picnic + Who is going to bring - Nam is going to camera? bring his camera + What is Tuan going to - He is going to bring bring? + Who can ask and answer? some food - work in pairs 4, Practice: III Listen: - Ask students look at the - Look at the Answer key pictures in B6 pictures Vui: c, e Mai: d + What you see in the - I see a ball/ Ly: b Nga: d picture a/ b/ c/ d/ e? Lan: a - Now, you listen to the tape - Listen to the + What is Vui going to bring? and match the names with teacher - She is going to bring some food the right pictures and a tent - Listen to the tape, please - Listen to the tape (3 times) + Who can ask and answer? and match - work in pairs - Give answer key? - check again 4.Consolidation:- New words - The text + Grammar: Near future tense Homework:- Learn by heart the words - Do exercises 3/ 116 in workbook ……………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 87: Unit fourteen: Making plans SectionC: Suggestions Lesson 5: C1,2,3,4 I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to talk about plans with entertainments Use the suggestions: Let's , What about -Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: minibus, suggestion, pagoda, good idea …… Grammar: - Let's + V + What about + V-ing .? + Why don't you ? III Teaching aids: -T:book, note book, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens , book, note book IV Proceduce: 1Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Ss go to the board and exercises 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents 1, Warm up: Unit 14: + Who's absent today? - The monitor Making plans + What's the date? answers + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call student go to the - student go to the board and exercise 3/ 116 board and exercise + Where people often go - They often go to Ha on vacation? Long Bay/ Hue citadel/ 2, Presentation: - Introduce the new lesson - Listen to the teacher - Show the pictures and ask: - Look at the pictures + What you see in the - I see pictures? - Explain the meaning of - Listen and write new words down - Read after me - Read in chorus + Who can read? - Read in individual - Listen to the tape, please - Listen to the tape (2 times) + Who can read the - Work in pairs dialogue? - Explain the new structures: - Listen and write "Suggestions" down + Let's go + What about .? + Why don't you/ we ? - Give some examples - Some students + Who can make sentences? make sentences 3, Comprehension check: - Ask students study card (questions a -> g) - Give the study card to students - Listen to the teacher - Receive the study card and in minutes + Who can ask and answer? - Work in pairs - Give answer key - Check again 4, Practice: - Look at the pictures, please + Where are the children? + What are they doing? - Look at the pictures - They are at the seaside - They are playing volleyball Period 87: C Suggestions C 1,2,3,4 I The dialogue: New words: - Minibus (n): xe buýt nhá - Suggestion (n): lêi gîi ý - Let's (v): h·y - What about ? - Why don't .? - Pagoda (n): chïa - Idea (n): ý kiÕn New structures: a, Suggestions: - Let's = Let us * Let's + V-inf - Let's go camping * What about + V-ing .? - What about going to Hue? * Why don't you/ we + V-inf? - Why don't we go to Huong Pagoda? b, Too + Adj: * S + to be + too + Adj - This bag is too big c, Why? - Because: + Why don't you play soccer? - Because I am tired II Answer: Example: + What does Lan want to do? - She wants to go camping Answer key a, Nam wants to visit Hue b, Nga wants to go to Huong pagoda c, She wants to walk d, Because it's too far e, He wants to travel by bike f, Because it's too hot g, He wants to trvel by minibus III Practice: Answer key a, Let's go to the seaside - They are visiting + Where are they visiting? the zoo - Ask students to use the structures "suggestions" in order to make sentences - Work in pairs + Who can ask and answer? - Ask students to practice: - Practice in pairs student gives a situation and the other gives the suggestions b, What about going to the musuem? c, Why don't we play volleyball? d, What about going to the zoo? e, Let's play badminton f, Why don't you go camping? 4.Consolidation:- New words - The new structures : "Suggestions" - Too + adj - Why? - Because Homework:- Learn by heart the words, new structures - Do exercises 1, 2, 3/ 116 in workbook ………………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:……………… …………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 88: Grammar practice I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to consolidated all structures that they have learnt from unit 12 to unit 14 Do some exercises - Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: sport show, team, match, …… Grammar: - Present simple/ progressive tenses - Future: Be going to - Adverbs of frequency - Suggestions III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call students go to the board and exercise 2, 3/ 117 - Remark Sts' activities - The monitor answers Contents Period 88: Grammar practice I Grammar: Present simple tense a, The usage: every P2: does Ex 3/ 117 b, Form: (+) S + V/ V-s/ -es + O - Listen to the (-) S + do/ does + not + V + O teacher (?) Do/ Does + S + V + O? 2, Presentation: - He plays soccer every day * Grammar: Adverbs of frequency: Present simple tense + Who can repeat the usage - Students repeat the always, usually, often, sometimes, never and form of it? usage and form * Luôn đứng sau tobe và đứng + Who can make sentences? - Some students trớc động từ thờng make sentences * Tr¶ lêi cho c©u hái How often? - Explain again - Listen and write - I'm always at home in the Adverbs of frequency + Who can repeat the advers - Students repeat the evening of frequency you have adverbs of frequency - I sometimes go to the zoo Present progressive tense learnt? a, The usage: now right now, at + Who can make the - Some students the moment, at present sentences? make sentences b, The form: - Explain again - Listen and write (+) S + am/ is/ are + V-ing Present progressive tense + Who can repeat the usage - Students repeat the (-) S + am/ is/ are + not + V-ing + O and form of it? usage and form (?) Am/ Is/ Are + S + V-ing ? + Who can make sentences? - Some students - She is listening to music make sentences Future: be going to - Explain again - Listen and write a, The usage: tomorrow, tonight, Future: be going to + Who can repeat the usage - Students repeat the next b, Form: and form of it? usage and form (+) S + be going to + V + O + Who can make sentences? - Some students (-) S + be going to + not + V make sentences (?) Am/ Is/ Are + going to + V + - Explain again - Listen and write O? + Answer the questions - We are going to visit Ha Noi 3, Practice: next week P1: does Ex 2/ 117 Exercise 1: Complete the dialogues - Ask students in minutes + Who can complete the dialogue a/ b/ c? - Give answer key Exercise2: Answer the questions + Who can ask and answer? - Remark Exercise 3: Complete the dialogues - Ask students in minutes + Who can complete the dialogue a/ b/ c? - Give answer key Exercise 4: - Ask students to look the pictures and ask/ answer + Who can ask and answer? - Remark - Ask students to complete the dialogue + Who can complete the dialogue? - Give answer key - Now you ask and answer about Vui + Who can ask and answer? - Give answer key Exrecise + 6: Answer the questions + Who can ask and answer? - Remark + Answer the questions - Students II Exercises: exercise in minutes Exercise 1: - Work in pairs Answer key a, Do/ like/ do/ play/ Do/ don't - Check again b, Does/ does/ likes/ does/ plays/ Does/ doesn't c, Do/ do/ do/ don't - Work in pairs Exercise 2: - Listen Students' answers Exercise 3: Answer key - Students a, am watching/ playing/ is exercise in minutes winning - Work in pairs b, is cooking/ aren't/ is c, am doing/ am reading - Check again Exercise 4: a, What are they going to do? - look at the pictures - They're going to play soccer b, They're going to play tennis - Work in pairs c, They're going to go camping - Listen to the teacher d, They're going to go - Students complete swimming the dialogue in 2' e, They're going to watch TV - Work in pairs f, They're going to cook meal * Complete the dialogue - Check again Answer key - Read the questions am going to / am going to/ am going to - Work in pairs * Answer the questions - Check again a, She's going to visit Hanoi b, She's going to stay in a hotel c, She's going to stay for a week - Work in pairs Exercise + 6: - Listen Students' asnwers 4.Consolidation:- The present simple/ progressive tenses - Adverbs of frequency - Future: be going to - Wh- questions Homework:- Learn by heart the new structures - Do again these exercises ……………………………………………………………………… Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 89: Written test - 45' I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: Work hard II.Language contents: Grammar: - Present simple/ progressive tenses - Future : be going to - Wh- questions III Teaching aids: -T:book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson 3.New lesson Questions I Choose the best answer Which sports you ? - I play soccer a go b play c I often go jogging a week a twice b two c three What's the weather like in Hanoi? a It's hot b I like hot weather c I'm hot What ewather you like? a, It's hot b I like hot weather c I'm hot What are you going to do? - a I play games b I'm going to play games c I'm playing games go camping a Let's b What about c you Minh usually go to school by bike but now he by motorbike Answer key I b - play a - twice a - It's hot b - I like hot weather b - I'm going to play games a - Let's a - is going Marks I marks 0,25 x = a is going b goes c doesn't go I have a new kite I a kite tomorrow a am going to fly b am flying c fly II Read and fill in the missing words There are four (1) in a year They (2) spring, summer, fall and (3) In the spring, the weather is usually (4) There (5) many flowers in the spring In the summer, the day is long and the night is short People often (6) swimmimg in this season The fall is the season of fruit In the winter, it's usually very (7) The day is short and the (8) is long III.Match the answer to the questions questions Answers What is he going to this weekend? 2.Who is he going with? How long is he going to stay? 4.Where is he going to stay? a.He’s going to stay with his grandparents b He’s going to stay for two days c He’s going to visit his home village d He’s going to with his uncle and aunt a - am going to fly II seasons are warm are winter go cold night III 1.- C III marks 0,25 x = 2.-D -B 4-A IV marks 0,5 x = IV IV Answer the questions What are you going to in the vacation? What are you going to this evening? How long are you going to stay ? V What are you going to on the 1weekend? 2V Listen and match the names with the things 31 Dung A kite 42 Lan and B some food Hoa Chung Lien II marks 0,25 x = Students' answers V marks 0,5 x = C some drink D a camping stove E a bike Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 90: Correct the written test I.objectives: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to -Skills: - Help sts to correct the mistakes in their tests -Do exercises -Attitude: -Work hard II.Language contents: -Vocabulary & Grammar : Contents of the tests III.teaching aids: -T: text book, plan, work book -Ss: text books, notebook, pens IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre - lesson (no check) 3.New lesson Mistakes I Choose the best answer b - I like hot weather a - I play games b - goes b - am flying II Read and fill in the missing words people how much tonight III Give the correct form of the verbs 1.- C 2.-D -B 4-A IV Answer the questions I'm going to go Ha Long Bay I'm going to go to swimming VI Listen and match the names with the things Dung Lan and Hoa Chung Lien 1234- Answer keys I b - play a - twice a - It's hot b - I like hot weather b - I'm going to play games a - Let's a - is going a - am going to fly II seasons are winter warm are go cold night III 1.- C 2.-D -B 4-A IV I'm going to go to I'm going to travel by I'm going to stay for I'm going to A kite B some food V 2- D C some drink - B 4- A D a camping - C stove Mark I marks 0,25 x = II marks 0,25 x = III marks 0,25 x = IV marks 0,5 x = V marks 0,5 x = E a bike Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 91: Unit fifteen: Countries Section A: We are the world Lesson 1: A 1,2, I objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to -Skills: - Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to to know about the names of some countries and distinguish between language and nationality - Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: country, nationality, language, Vietnamese, Canada, Canadian, France, French, China, Chinese, Japan, Japanese, America, …… Grammar: + Wh- questions: What, Which, Where III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre- lesson: ( no check ) 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let's students play game "Noughts and crosses" play visit stay want watch go cook see walk Sts' activities - The monitor answers Contents Countries Unit 15: Period 91: A We are the world A -> - Students play game I Listen and repeat: New words: - Canada (n): níc Canada - Canadian (n): ngêi/ tiÕng Presentation: - Introduce the new lesson + How many countries are there in the world? + Could you tell me the names of the countries you know? - Show the pictures and ask: + What you see in the pictures? - Explain the meaning of new words - Read after me + Who can read? - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read sentences? - Explain the model sentences: + Where are you from? - I'm from Vietnam + Where is Laura from? + Who can ask and answer? 3, Comprehension check: - Look at the text, please, - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read? - Explain the new structures: + Which language you speak? - I speak Vietnamese + Who can ask and answer about Minh? + Who can ask and answer about your partners? - Listen to the teacher - There are about countries in the world - Vietnam, Canada, China, Japan, - Look at the pictures - I see - Listen and write down - Read in chorus - Some students read - Listen to the tape - Some students read - Listen and write down - She is from Canada - Work in pairs Canada - France (n): níc Ph¸p - French (n): ngêi/ tiÕng - China (n): níc TQ - Chinese (n): ngêi/ tiÕng - USA = The United States of America/ America (n): Mü - American (n): ngêi Mü - Japan (n): níc NhËt - Japanese (n): ngêi/ tiÕng - Great Britain = England (n): níc Anh - British (n): ngêi Anh - English (n): ngêi/ tiÕng - Australia (n): níc óc - Australian (n): ngêi óc - Vietnamese (n): ngêi/ tiÕng ViÖt Nam - Speak (v): nãi - Nationality (n): quèc tÞch - Language (n): ng«n ng÷ Model sentences: + Where are you from? - I'm from Vietnam + Where is Laura from? - She is from Canada - Look at the text - Listen to the tape II The text: - Some students read * Model sentences: - Listen and write + Which language you speak? down - I speak Vietnamese * Introduce about you My name is Lan I'm from - Work in pairs Vietnam I speak Vietnamese - Practice freely 4, Practice: - Look at the table in A3, please - Look at the table - Explain the new structure: + What's your nationality? - Listen and write - I'm Vietnamese down - My nationality is III Practice: * Model sentences: + What's your nationality? Vietnamese - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can ask and answer about these people? + Who can tell about yourselves? - I am Vietnamese - My nationality is Vietnamese - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - Some students tell about themselves 4.Consolidation:- New words - The new structures : + Where are you from? - I'm from + Which language you speak? - I speak + What's your nationality? - I'm Homework:- Learn by heart the words, new structures - Do exercises 1, 2/ 126 in workbook Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 92: Unit fifteen: Countries Section A: We are the world Lesson2: A 4,5,6, I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: -Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to practice asking and answer about countries, language and nationality Write a postcard, using present progressive and future tenses -Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: wet, Tower, …… Grammar: + Wh- questions - Present progressive and future tenses III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook, IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.ChÑk the pre-lesson -Call Ss go to the board and exercises 1, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? - The monitor Unit 15: Countries + What's the date? answers Period 92: + How are you? A We are the world * Check old lesson: P1: does ex 1/ 126 A -> - Call students go to the board and exercises P2: does ex 2/ 126 - remark 2, Presentation: - Introduce the new lesson - Ask students complete the dialogue + Who can complete the dialogue? - Give answer key + Who can ask and answer? (about the people in A1) 3, Comprehension check: - Look at the postcard from Nhan + Who can read? + Where is Nhan? + How does he traveling? + Who is writing the postcard? + Where is Nhan going to visit tomorrow? - Now write a postcard to - Listen to the teacher I Make dialogues: - Students in Answer key minutes Thu: Who's that? - Work in pairs Chi: That's Laura Thu: Where is she from? - Check again Chi: She's from Canada - Work in pairs Thu: What's her nationality? Chi: She's Canadian Thu: Which language does she speak? - Look at the Chi: She speaks English postcard - Some students read - He's on vacation in London II Write: - By bus Dear Nhan, - Nhan is writing the I am on vacation in postcard - He is going to visit the tower of London tomorrow - Students write in minutes Nhan from Minh begin with: Dear Nhan, I am on vacation in + Who can write on the board? + Who can read your postcard? - Remark on the board - student goes to the board and writes - Some students read their postcard - Listen to the teacher 4, Practice: - Now you practice with your partners + Who can ask and answer the questions? - Remark - Listen to the teacher - Work in pairs III Answer: a, What's your name? - My name is b, How old are you? - I'm c, Where are you from? - I'm from d, Which language you speak? - I speak e, Which school you go to? - I go to f, Which grade are you in? - I'm in grade - Listen to the teacher 4.Consolidation:- The new structures : + Where are you from? - I'm from + Which language you speak? - I speak + What's your nationality? - I'm Homework:- Learn by heart the new structures - Do exercises 3, 4, 5/ 128 in workbook Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 93: Unit fifteen: Countries Section B: Cities, buildings and people Lesson3: B 1, I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills -Attitude: -Help sts to use the comparatives and superlatives with adjectives: big, small, tall, Tell about the population of the countries - Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: bigger, biggest, taller, tallest, smaller, smallest, population, capital, million, …… Grammar: - Ho Chi Minh city is bigger than Hanoi - Mexico city is the biggest city in the world + Which is the bigger : london or Tokyo? III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan - Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call Ss go to the board and exercises 3, 4, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Sts' activities Contents Warm up: Unit 15: Countries + Who's absent today? - The monitor Period 93: + What's the date? answers B Cities, buildings and people + How are you? B 1, * Check old lesson: P1: does ex 3/ 128 - Call students go to the I Listen and repeat: board and exercises P2: does ex 4/ 128 New words: - remark - Bigger (adj): lín h¬n - Biggest (adj): lín nhÊt 2, Presentation: - Smaller (adj): nhá h¬n - Introduce the new lesson - Listen to the teacher - Smallest (adj): nhá nhÊt - Show the pictures and ask - Lookat the pictures - Taller (adj): cao h¬n students remark about and remark about the - Tallest (adj): cao nhÊt differences between the differences between - Building (n): tßa nhµ pictures the pictures - Population (n): d©n sè - Explain the new words - listen and write - Capital (n): thủ đô down - Million : triÖu - Read after me, please - Read in chorus New structures: + Who can read - Some students read a, Comparatives: - Listen to the tape, please - Listen to the tape - a big building (2 times) - a bigger building + Who can read? - Some students read * Note: - Explain the new stuctures: - Listen and write - TT dạng so sánh kém đợc comparatives and down cÊu t¹o thªm ®u«i -er vµo sau TT superlatives (TT ng¾n) - Give the example - Read and write the - TT dµi ta thªm more vµo tríc example TT + Who can make sentences? - Some students - TT ng¾n kªt thóc lµ phô ©m, make sentences trớc là ng âm ta nhân đôi phụ Comprehension check: ©m cuèi råi thªm - er - Introduce the text - Listen to the * Form: teacher - Listen to the tape S1 + tobe + adj + -er + than + S2 - Listen to the tape, please - Lan is taller than Hoa (2 times) b, Superlatives: + Who can read? - Some students read - the biggest building - Explain the way reading: - Listen and repeat * Note: 13.6 = thirteen point six - TT dạng so sánh đợc - Give students study card - Receive the study cÊu t¹o thªm the vµo tríc vµ ®u«i and ask them to in card and in - est vµo sau TT minutes minutes - TT dµi ta thªm the most vµo tríc + Who can ask and answer? - Work in pairs TT - Give answer key - Check again * Form: S + tobe + the adj - est + Practice: - Lan is the tallest student in my - Give students an exercise - Students class and ask them to in exercise in minutes II The text: minutes Answer key Correct the mistakes in the - Some students give a, No HCM city is bigger than sentences their answers Hanoi city a, Mexico city is biggest city - Check again b, Mexico city in the world c, Tokyo b, It has a population 2.6 III Practice: million - Students repeat Answer key c, HCM city is biger than a, the biggest Hanoi capital b, population of + Who can correct the c, bigger sentence a/ b/ c/? - Write down - Give answer key 4.Consolidation:- New words - The new structures : + Comparatives and superlatives Homework:- Learn by heart the new words and structures - Do exercises 1/ 129 in workbook Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 94: Unit fifteen: Countries Section B: Cities, buildings and people Lesson4: B ,4,5 I.obiectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to compare about measurement of famous structures in the world Ask and answer "How + adj ?" - Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: high, thick, structure, Petronas Twin Towers, Great Wall, Sears Tower, …… 2.Grammar: + How long/ thick/ is the Great Wall? - It's 452 meters high III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call Ss go to the board and exercises 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1.Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call students go to the board and exercises - remark Presentation: * Pre- reading - Introduce the new lesson - Show the pictures and ask some questions - Explain the new words - Read after me, please + Who can read Comprehension check: * While- reading - Introduce the text - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) Sts' activities - The monitor answers P1: does ex 1/ 129 Contents Unit 15: Countries Period 94: B Cities, buildings and people B 3,4, P2: does ex 2/ 129 I The text: - Listen to the teacher - Lookat the pictures and answer - listen and write down - Read in chorus - Some students read New words: - Petronas Twin Towers (n): th¸p đôi - Great Wall (n): v¹n lý trêng thµnh - Structure(n): kiÕn tróc - Tower (n): th¸p - Listen to the teacher New stuctures: + Which is taller: Sears Tower or - Listen to the tape Petronas Twin Tower? + Who can read? + Which is taller: Sears Tower or Petronas Twin Towers? + Which is longer: Red river or Lo river? + Which is bigger: my school or yours? - Look at the picture in part + What you see in the picture? + Where is it? - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read? - Explain the questions: + How + adj + tobe + S? - It's + How long is the table? + How wide is your class? 4.Practice: + Who can ask and answer about the places in the pictures? + Who can ask and answer (freely)? - Give students exercise: Answer the questions a, Which is shorter, Sears Tower or Petronas Twin Towers? b, How long is the Sears Tower? c, Is the Great Wall the longest structure in thw world? d, Is Petronas Twin Towers the tallest building in the world? - Some students read - Petronas Twin Towers is taller than Sears Topwer - Red river is longer than Lo river - My school is bigger than yours - Look at the picture - Petronas Twin Towers is taller the Sears Tower + How long/ high/ thick is the Great Wall? - It's How + adj + tobe + S? It's - I see "Van Ly ." - It is in China - Listen to the tape - Some students read - Listen to the teacher and write down - It's 1.2 meters - It's meters - Work in pairs - Work in pairs - Students exercise in minutes 4.Consolidation:- New words - The new structures : + How + adj + tobe + S? III Practice: Answer key a, Sears Tower is shorter than Petronas Twin Towers b, Sears Tower is 442 meters high c, Yes, it's d, Yes, it's - It's Homework:- Learn by heart the new words and structures - Do exercises 3/ 129 in workbook Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 95: Unit fifteen: Countries Section C: Natural features Lesson5: C1,2,3 I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills -Attitude: -Help sts to introduce about the country Know more about the rivers and mountains in Vietnam and in the world -Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: feature, forest, desert, beach, flow to, North Africa, Mediterranean Sea, …… Grammar: - Structures: many/ much/ lots of III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: book, notebook, pens IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call some Ss go to the board and exercises 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1.Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call student go to the board and exercise - remark Presentation: * Pre- reading Sts' activities - The monitor answers P: does ex 3/ 129 Contents Unit 15: Countries Period 95: C Natural features C1,2,3 I The text: - Introduce the new lesson - Show the pictures and ask some questions + What you see in the picture? - Explain the new words + Forest: It's a place where there are many trees and animals + Desert: It's a place where is dry and sandy + Beach: It's a place where is sandy beside the sea - Read after me, please + Who can read 3.Comprehension check: * While- reading - Introduce the text - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read? + Does Vietnam have many mountains? + Does Vietnam have any deserts? + Which is the longest rivers in Vietnam? - Now, look at the pictures Complete the passage + Who can complete sentence a/ b/ c/ d/ ? - Give answer key - Explain the way how to use "lots of" many Lots of = much - Listen to the teacher - Lookat the pictures and answer - I see New words: - Forest (n): rõng - Desert (n): sa m¹c - Beach (n): bê biÓn - Listen and write down Complete the passage a, mountains e, forests b, rivers f, beaches c, lakes g, deserts d, rain New stuctures: - Read in chorus - Some students read Lots of = many much Lots of + plural countable N - Listen to the teacher uncountable N - Listen to the tape - We have lots of beaches - We have lots of rain - Some students read - Yes, it does - No, it doesn't III The text: - Mekong river is the longest river in Vietnam - Look at the pictures and complete the passage in minutes - Some students give their answers - Check again New words: - Flow to (v): ch¶y - Start (v): b¾t nguån - North Africa (n): B¾c phi - Mediteranean Sea (n): biÓn địa trung hải - Listen and write down Lots of + plural countable N uncountable N - Look at the pictures and ask / answer + Who can ask and answer? * The text (C 3) - Work in pairs - Listen to the tape, please Answer the questions: a, The Mekong river b, China c, The Nile river d, The Mediterranean Sea e, Mount Everest f, Phanxipang - Listen to the tape (1 time) + Who can find out the new words? - Explain the meaning of new words - Read after me - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read? - Find out the new words - Listen and write down - Read in chorus - Listen to the tape again - Some students read 4, Practice: * Post- reading: - Ask students answer the questions in minutes - Students answer the questions in minutes + Who can ask and answer? - Work in pairs - Give answer key - Check again + Who can answer my - Some students questions: answer + In your town, which is the - biggest lake? + Which is the highest - Petronas Twin tower? Towers is the highest tower + Which the longest river in - Mekong river is the Vietnam? longest river in Vietnam + Where does that river - It starts in Tibet start? 4.Consolidation:- New words - The new structures : many Lots of = much Lots of + plural countable N uncountable N Homework:- Learn by heart the new words and structures - Do exercises 1, 2, 3/ 130 in workbook Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 96: Unit sixteen: Man and the environment Section A: Animals and plants Lesson1: A 1,2, I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills -Attitude:- Help sts to use the questions "How much, How many" and adjectives: some, a lot, a little, a few -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: cart, cow, buffalo, dog, cat, grow, produce, plow, pull, Grammar: - Questions: How much, How many? - Adjectives: some, a lot, alittle, a few III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: book, notebook,pens IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call some Ss go to the board and exercises 1, 2, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call student go to the board and exercise - remark Presentation: * Pre- reading - Ask students look at the pictures + What you see in the first/ second/ picture? + Who can remark about the Sts' activities - The monitor answers P: does ex 3/ 129 - Lookat the pictures and answer - I see - Some students Contents Unit 16: Man and the environment Period 96: A Animals and plants A 1,2, I Listen and repeat: - Some: mét vµi - A lot of: nhiÒu - A few: mét Ýt - A little: mét Ýt * Use: + some/ a lot of/ a few + DT đếm đợc số nhiều quantity of rice/ eggs? - Explain the adjectives: a little, a few, some, a lot of - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read? + Who can repeat the question about quantity? - Explain the questions: How much/ How many? - Ask students look at the picture in part + What does he do? + What farmers usually produce? - Explain the meaning of new words - Read after me + Who can read? remark - Listen and write down - Listen to the tape + some/ a lot of/ a little + DT không đếm đợc - Dïng tr¶ lêi cho c©u hái: + How much + DT không đếm đợc + .? - Some students read + How many + DT đếm đợc sè nhiÒu - Some students repeat - Listen and write II The text: down New words: - Look at the - Produce (v): s¶n xuÊt pictures - Grow (v): trång - He's a farmer - Animal (n): động vật - They usually - Buffalo (n): tr©u produce rice/ - Cow (n): bß - Listen and write - Pull (v): kÐo (xe) down - Cart (n): xe bß - Read in chorus - Plow (v): cµy - Some students read 3, Comprehension check: Answer the questions: * While- reading Answer keys - Introduce the text a, He produces a lot of rice - Listen to the tape, please - Listen to the teacher b, Yes, he does (2 times) - Listen to the tape c, He produces a little fruit + Who can read? d, They produce a little milk - Give study card - Some students read e, They produce a lot of eggs - Ask students to answer the - Students receive questions (a -> e) study card and in + Who can ask and answer? minutes - Give answer keys - Work in pairs - Check again III Practice: 4, Practice: * Listen: * Post- reading: Answer keys - Ask students to practice a, a lot of d, a few again - Practice in pairs b, some e, a little + Who can tell about Mr c, a lot of f, some Hai? - students tell about + How many potatoes are there? * Listen: Mr Hai - There are a lot of potatoes - Look at the pictures + How much rice is there? + How many potatoes are - Look at the pictures - There is a little rice there? - There are a lot of + How much rice is there? potatoes - Listen to the tape, please - There is a little rice (2 times) - Listen to the tape + Who can ask and answer? - Give answer key - Some students give their answers - Check again 4.Consolidation:- New words - The text - The new structures : + some, a lot of, a few, a little + How much/ How many? Homework:- Learn by heart the new words and structures - Do exercises 1, 2/ 132 in workbook Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 97: Unit sixteen: Man and the environment Section A: Animals and plants Lesson2: A 4,5, I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: -Practice skills -Attitude : -Help sts to consolidated the present progressive tense By the end of lesson, they understand more about the reason why some animals are in danger -Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: burn, more, cut down, danger, destroy, Asian, 2.Grammar: - Present progressive tense - Why? - Because III Teaching aids: -T:book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call some Ss go to the board and exercises 1, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call student go to the board and exercise - remark 2.Presentation: * Pre- reading - Show some pictures and ask: + What you see in the pictures? - Explain the meaning of new words - Read after me + Who can read? 3.Comprehension check: * While- reading - Introduce the text Sts' activities - The monitor answers Contents Unit 16: Man and the environment Period 96: A Animals and plants A ,5, P: does ex 2/ 133 I The text: New words: - More: nhiÒu h¬n - Land (n): đất - Cut down (v): chÆt, c¾t - Look at the pictures - Burn (v/ n): đốt cháy/ vết bỏng and answer - Destroy (v): ph¸ hñy - I see - Danger (n): sù nguy hiÓm - Asian: ch©u ¸ - Listen and write New structure: down + Why .? - Read in chorus - Because - Some students read + Why does the world need more food? - Because there are more people - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the tape II Practice: * Answer the questions - Listen to the tape, please Answer keys (2 times) a, Why we need more land? + Who can read? - Because there are more people - Explain the question: - Some students read b, Why farmers burn the Why? - Listen and write forests? + Why does the world need down - Because they need more land more food? c, Why are these Asian animals - Because there are more in danger? people - Because people/ we are - Ask students to study card - Students in destroying their home and their (questions a -> c) minutes environment + Who can ask and answer? - Work in pairs - Give answer keys - Check again * Discuss: "How to protect these endanger Practice: Asian animals" * Post- reading: - Let students discuss topic:"How to protect these endanger Asian animals?" - Give suggestions: * We have to: + stop burning the forest + stop cut down the forest + stop hunting these animals + Who can report in front of class? - Students discuss in groups * We have to: + stop burning the forests + stop cut down the forest + stop hunting these animals - Use the suggestions - Some students report before the class 4.Consolidation:- New words - The text - The new structures : + Why ? - Because Homework: -Learn by heart the new words and structures - Do exercises 3/ 133 in workbook Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 98: Unit sixteen: Man and the environment SectionB: Pollution Lesson3: B 1,2, I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude:-Help sts to know more words about the environment Use the present progressive tense in order to talk about the environment -Work hard II.Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: pollution, trash, bottle, can, save, pollute, keep off, damage, collect, Grammar: - Present progressive tense - Imperative III Teaching aids: -T:book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: book, notebook, pens IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call some Ss go to the board and exercises 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1.Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call student go to the board and exercise - remark Sts' activities - The monitor answers P: does ex 3/ 133 Contents Unit 16: Man and the environment Period 98: B Pollution B 1,2, I The text: * New words: - Waste (v): l·ng phÝ - Coal (n): than 2.Presentation: - Oil (n): dÇu * Pre- reading - Gas (n): khí đốt - Show some pictures and - Look at the pictures - Power (n): n¨ng lîng ask: and answer - Pollute (v): « nhiÔm + What you see in the - I see - Pollution (n): sù « nhiÔm pictures? - Air (n): bÇu kh«ng khÝ - Explain the meaning of - Listen and write - Trash (n): r¸c th¶i new words down - Save (v): tiÕt kiÖm - Read after me - Read in chorus + Who can read? - Some students read II Practice: Answer the questions Answer keys Comprehension check: a, Why are wild animals and * While- reading plants in danger? - Introduce the text - Listen to the - Because we are destroying the teacher forests - Listen to the tape, please b, What is polluting the air? (2 times) - Listen to the tape - Gases are polluting the air./ + Who can read? - Give students study card - Some students read People are polluting the air: they are burning too much coal, oil ans ask them to (a -> d) - Students in and gas + Who can ask and answer? minutes c, Where does the pollution come - Give answer keys - Work in pairs from? - Check again - The pollution comes from gases Practice: and trash * Post- reading: d, What is polluting the land, the - Look at the pictures in B2 - Look at the pictures + What can we to protect - We don't throw the environment? trash on the street/ - Explain the meaning of - Listen and write new words down - Read after me - Read in chorus + Who can read? - Some students read + Who can read the - Some students read sentences? sentences - Listen to the tape and - Listen to the tape match the rules with these and match signs (3 times) + Who can read and match? - Some students give their answers - Give answer keys - Check again * Play with words - Listen to the tape, please + Who can read? rivers and the oceans? - Trash is polluting the land, rivers and oceans Match: Rules a b c d e f g h Signs c f a h e b g d * Play with words - Listen to the tape - Some students read 4.Consolidation:- New words - The text Homework:- Learn by heart the new words and structures - Do exercises 1, 2/ 134 in workbook Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 99: Unit sixteen: Man and the environment SectionB: Pollution Lesson4: B 4, I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills -Attitude: -Help sts to use modal verb: should, shouldn't in order to give the advices - Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: should, shouldn't Grammar: - Modal verb: should, shouldn't - Advices III Teaching aids: -T:book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call some Ss go to the board and exercises 1, 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game: "Matching" Collect Don't pick Don't throw Save Keep off Sts' activities - The monitor answers Unit 16: Man and the environment Period 99: B Pollution - Students play game B 4, trash on the streets water the grass flowers paper 2.Presentation: * Pre- reading - Show some pictures and ask: + What you when you see this problem? - Explain the meaning of new words "should, shouldn't" * Example: - We should save water - We shouldn't waste it + Who can make sentences 3.Comprehension check: * While- reading - Introduce the text Contents I The dialogue: * New words: - Should/ Shouldn't (MV): nªn/ kh«ng nªn - Look at the pictures * Use: Dùng để đa lời and answer khuyªn - I can Should/ Shouldn't + V- inf Example: - Listen and write - We should save water down - We shouldn't waste it II Practice: - Some students make sentences Study card: Put the sentences in the correct order Answer keys - Listen to the teacher (5)Lan: We shouldn't leave our - Listen to the tape trash (4)Ba: What are we going to do? - Work in groups (1)Nga: Put it in a trash can (3)Nam: There aren't any trash - Students receive the cans study card and in (2)Lan: Then we should put it in minutes a bag and take it home - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read? - Give students study card and ask them to put the sentences in the correct order (1)Nga: Put it in a trash can (2)Lan: Then we should put it in a bag and take it home (3)Nam: There aren't any trash cans (4)Ba: What are we going to do? (5)Lan: We shouldn't leave our trash + Who can put the - Work in groups sentences? - Give answer keys - Check again 4, Practice: * Post- reading: - Look at the pictures in B5 + Who can read the example? - Ask students to write rules for the pictures + Who can read your sentences? - Give answer keys Write rules for the pictures: Example: a, We should not leave trash b, We shouldn't waste water c, We shouldn't damage the trees d, We should collect bottles and cans e, We shouldn't pick flowers - Look at the pictures - Some students read the eaxample - Students write in minutes - Some students read their sentences - Check again 4.Consolidation:- New words "should/ shouldn't" Should/ Shouldn't + V- inf - The advices Homework:- Learn by heart the new words and structures - Do exercises 3/ 135 in workbook Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 100: Unit sixteen: Man and the environment Section B: Pollution Lesson5: B 6, I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to talk about the activities to protect the environment in Viet Nam - Work hard II.Language contents: a, Vocabulary: recycle, scrap metal, plastic, factory, b, Grammar: - Review: present simple tense III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson -Call some Ss go to the board and exercises 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Let students play game: "Network" Sts' activities Contents - The monitor answers Unit 16: Man and the environment - Students play game Period 100: B Pollution B 6, waste things cans Presentation: * Pre- reading - Introduce the text - Explain the meaning of new words - Read after me + Who can read? 3.Comprehension check: * While- reading I The text: New words: - Recycle (v): t¸i chÕ - Listen to the teacher - Feed (v): cho ¨n - Listen and write - Pig (n): lîn down - Scrap metal (n): s¾t thÐp phÕ - Students read in th¶i chorus - Plastic (n): nhùa - Some students read - Use (v): sö dông Study card: Complete the table - Listen to the tape, please (2 times) + Who can read? - Give students study card and ask them to complete the table - Listen to the tape - Some students read - Students receive the study card and complete the table in minutes We collect What for - waste food - empty bottle and cans - waste paper, scrap metal and old plastic + Who can complete the table? - Give answer keys We collect - waste food What for - feed to pigs - empty bottle - recycle and cans - waste paper, - recycle scrap metal and old plastic II Practice: - Some students give their answers - Check again * Answer the questions a, In Viet Nam, we collect and recycle waste food, empty food, empty bottles, cans, waste paper, Practice: scrap metal and old plastic * Post- reading: b, We collect waste food and feed - Ask students to answer the - Students answer the it to pigs questions in questions c, Factories use all these things to minutes recycle + Who can ask and answer? - Work in pairs d, Yes, we - Check again - Give answer keys e, We collect waste paper, empty bottles and cans 4.Consolidation:- New words - The problem of environment Homework:-Learn by heart the new words - Do exercises 4, 5/ 135 in workbook Written test - 15' Questions I Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets Lan and Nga (drink) iced tea at the moment There (not be) any water in Answer keys I Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets are drinking isn't Marks I marks 1x4=4 the bottle I and my friends often (listen ) to music after school She (eat) a lot of fruit every day II Make questions for underlined words Lan wants to go camping He is going to visit his friends They are going to stay there for days The farmer produces a lot of rice III Match the answers to the questions Questions What is he doing now? Does he play soccer in his free time? How old is he? How often does he go to school? Is Ba a student? What time does he go to school? Where does he live? What is he going to this Sunday? listen eats II Make questions for underlined words What does Lan want to do? Who is he going to visit? How long are they going to stay there? How much rice does the farmer produce? III Match the answers to the questions f d g c Answers a, Yes, he is b b, In a flat in Hanoi c, days a week d, Yes, he does e, He is going to visit his home village f, He is listening to music g, he is 12 h, At o'clock a h II marks 1x4=4 III marks 0,25 x = e Pre-date:……………… …………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 101: Grammar practice I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: - Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to consolidated the structures and grammar they have learned and some exercises -Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: - Review the words Grammar: - Review: + Present simple and progressive tenses + Adjectives + Indefinite quantifiers: a few, a little, a lot/l III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson ( no check ) 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1.Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check old lesson: - Call students go to the board and exercise 5/135 Presentation: * Grammar: Present simple tense + Who can repeat the use and form of it? + Who can make sentences? Present progressive tense + Who can repeat the use and form of it? + Who can make sentences? Adjectives: Comparatives and superlatives + Who can repeat the Sts' activities - The monitor answers - Student goes to the board and exercise 5/ 135 - Some students repeat and make sentences - Some students repeat and make sentences - Some students Contents I Grammar: Simple present tense S + am/ is/ are + O S + V/ V-s, -es + O - He is always late for school - We often play football Present progressive tense S + am/ is/ are + V-ing + O - They are listening to music now Adjectives: Comparatives and superlatives long -> longer -> the longest S1 + to be + adj -er + than + S2 + S + to be + the adj -est + - He is younger than her - This house is the most beautiful Indefinite quantifiers: a few, a little, a lot/ lots * a few/ a lot/ lots of + N (countnouns) - Some students * a little/ a lot/ lots of + N repeat and make (uncountnouns) sentences II Practice: Exercise 1: a, Do/ speak/ don't/ speak Practice: b, speaks Exercise 1: - Students c, speaks Chinese - Ask students to exercise exercise in minutes d, speaks Japanese in minutes - Work in pairs e, speaks Vietnamese + Who can complete the f, speaks English dialogue a/ b/ c/ d/ e/ f? - Check again Exercise 2: - Give answer keys a, is d, is Exercise 2: - Students b, lives e, does/ teaches - Ask students exercise in exercise in minutes c, is/ is staying minutes - Work in pairs f, Does / teach/ doesn't/ teaches + Who can complete the Exercise 3: dialogue a/ b/ c/ d/ e/ f? - Check again short-> shorter -> the shortest - Give answer keys tall -> taller -> the tallest Exercise 3: Complete the small->smaller-> the smallest table Then complete the big -> bigger -> the biggest passages - Students in 10 high -> higher -> the highest - Ask students exercise in minutes thick-> thicker -> the thickest 10 minutes - Some students a, longer/ the longest + Who can complete the complete the table b, the longest table? - Listen to the teacher c, the tallest/ taller/ the tallest - Remark and correct their and correct d, biggest/ bigger/ the biggest the mistakes - Some students biggest + Who can complete the complete the Exercise 4: sentence a/ b/ c/ d? sentences - a lot/ a little/ a few - Check again - a lot/ lots/ a lot - Give answer keys structures? + Who can make sentences? Indefinite quantifiers: a few, a little, a lot/ lots + Who can repeat the use and form of them? + Who can make sentences? Exercise 4: - Ask students to complete the passages in minuts + Who can complete the passages? - Give answer keys repeat and make sentences - Students exercise in minutes - Some students complete the passages - Check again 4.Consolidation:- Present simple and progressive tenses - Adjectives: comparatives and superlatives - Indefinite quantifiers: a few, a little, a lot/ lots Homework:- Learn by heart the structures - Do again these exercises Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 102: Revision I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: -Help sts to consolidated the structures and grammar they have learned and some exercises - Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: - Review the words Grammar: - Review: + Near future tense + Suggestions + Wh- questions III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss:pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson (no check) 3.New lesson Teacher's activities 1.Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? Sts' activities - The monitor answers Contents I Grammar: Near future tense S + am/ is/ are + going to + V-inf + O - We are going to go camping Grammar: a, Near future tense + Who can repeat the use and form of it? + Who can make sentences? Suggestions + Who can repeat the structures? + Who can make sentences? Wh- questions: + Who can repeat the Whquestions you have learn? + Who can make sentences? Exercises: Exercise 1: Supply the correct form of the verbs My family (take) a trip to Da Lat next week Miss Lan (do) the housework every morning Let's (help) her She (not want) any coffee She (want) some tea My brother and sister often (go) to school by bus every day Exercise 2: Make the questions for underlined words She want a cup of coffee Miss Hoa always has toast and eggs for breakfast I always go to school with my friends on weekdays My mother is going to the market now We go to the English club twice a week Exercise 3: Change these - Some students repeat and make sentences - Some students repeat and make sentences - Some students repeat and make sentences next Sunday Suggestions + Let's + V-inf + What about + V-ing? + Why don't you/ we + V-inf? * Play football + Let's play football + What about playing football? + Why don't you/ we play football? Wh- questions What, Where, When Which, How, Who + How often you go to school? - I go to school six times a week - Students exercise in minutes II Exercises: Exercise 1: Supply the correct form of the verbs - Some students read 1, is going to take their sentences 2, does 3, help - Check again 4, doesn't want/ wants 5, go Exercise 2: Make the questions for underlined words How much coffee does she want? - Students What does Miss Hoa often exercise in minutes have for breakfast? When you always go to school with your friends? Where is your mother going - Some students read now? their questions How often you go to English club? - Check again Exercise 3: Change these sentences into negatives and interrogatives I don't always have lunch at home - Students in 10 + Do you always have lunch at minutes home? sentences into negatives and interrogatives I always have lunch at - Some students give home their answers My sister is doing her homework now Tan can swim Miss Lan wants some - Check again butter My mother cuts some flowers every morning Thu likes some orange juice Nam and Ba are going to visit Hue next Sunday They are from Japan My sister isn't doing her homwwork now + Is your sister doing her homework now? Tan can't swim + Can Tan swim? 4.Miss Lan doesn't want some butter + Does Miss Lan want some butter? My mother doesn't cut some flowers every morning + Does your mother cut some flowers every morning? 4.Consolidation:- Near future tense - Suggestions - Wh- questions Homework:- Learn by heart the structures - Do again these exercises Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 103: Revision I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: - Review the words Grammar: - Review: all structures and some exercises III Teaching aids: -T: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss: pens , book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? Grammar: - Introduce the structures and give students some exercises - Ask students Exercises: Exercise 1: Choose the best answer 1.He doesn't want a movie (see/ to see/ seeing/ watch) It's never in the winter (hot/ cold/ warm/ cool) How are they going to stay there? - For days (many/ much/ often/ long) They are aerobics now (play/ playing/ do/ doing) We are going to Nha Trang beach this summer (stay/ go/ visit/ travel) Ba and Nga often listen to music in free time (your/ his/ her/ their) We have English on Tuesday and on Saturday We have it a week (once/ twice/ two times/ three times) Lan doesn't like watching TV She watches TV (always/ usually/ never/ often) Exercise 2: Put the words in their correct orders ( no check) Sts' activities - The monitor answers Contents I Grammar: - Review all structures - Exercises - Listen to the teacher - Students exercises II Exercises: Exercise 1: Choose the best answer 1, to see 2, hot 3, long 4, doing 5, visit 6, their twice never - Students exercise in 10 minutes - Some students read their sentences - Check again Exercise 2: Put the words in their correct orders How much coffee you want? What time does Mai usually get up? There are some oranges and some bananas They sometimes have a picnic but not always How often are you late for school? coffee/ want/ you/ much/ do/ how? does/ Mai/ get/ usually/ time/ up/ what? some/ oranges/ there/ some/ bananas/ and/ are sometimes/ picnic/ they/ have/ a/ always/ not/ but are/ often/ how/ late/ school/ you/ for? + Who can read your sentences? - Give answer keys Exercise 3: Fill in the blanks with suitable prepositions Are you free Saturday My birthday is October 20th We're going the cinema Where's Mr Long .? - He's France It's very cold the winter What's the weather like London? Is there a blackboard that room? My classroom is the second floor - Students exercise in minutes - Some students read their sentences - Check again - Students in 10 minutes Exercise 3: Fill in the blanks with suitable prepositions on on to from/ from in in in on - Some students give their answers - Check again 4.Consolidation:- Review all structures Homework:- Learn by heart the structures - Do again these exercises Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 104: Revision I.objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to - Skills: Practice skills - Attitude: Work hard II.Language contents: Vocabulary: - Review the words Grammar: - Review: all structures and some exercises III Teaching aids: -T:book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,plan -Ss:pens, book, notebook IV Proceduce: 1.Greeting 2.Check the pre-lesson: ( no check) 3.New lesson Teacher's activities Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? sts' activities - The monitor answers Contents I Grammar: - Review all structures - Exercises Grammar: - Introduce the structures and give students some exercises - Ask students Exercises: Exercise 1: Make the questions for the answers I often go to school by bus Mai often gets up at six o'clock He goes to the cinema once a month We are going to visit our uncle next week Yes, he often plays soccer in the afternoon I want some eggs There are forty students in my class Her favorite food is chicken - Listen to the teacher - Students exercises - Students exercise in 10 minutes - Some students read their sentences II Exercises: Exercise 1: Make the questions for the answers How you often go to school? What time does Mai often get up? How often does he go to the cinema? What are you going to next week? Does he often play soccer? What you want? How many students are there in your class? What is her favorite food? What is his favorite sport? 10 What does your father do? His favorite sport is soccer 10 My father is a driver Exercise 2: Rewrite the sentences so that it has the same meaning to the first The book is blue -> It's The girl is beautiful -> She is She likes noodles -> Her favorite The Amazon River is longer than the Mekong River -> The Mekong River is Your bicycle is newer than my bicycle -> My bicycle is + Who can read your sentences? - Give answer keys Exercise 3: Choose the suitable words to fill in the blanks (happy, having, they, lunch, her, dishes, home, comes, vegetables) The Pikes are (1) breakfast now Mr Pike goes to work at o'clock He always has (2) at his office He (3) home at o'clock Mrs Pike is washing the (4) Mary is helping (5) The Pikes always have dinner at (6) (7) often have (8) and fish for dinner They are (9) + Who can complete? - Give answer keys - Check again Exercise 2: Rewrite the sentences so that it has the same meaning to the first It's a blue book - Students She is a beautiful girl exercise in minutes Her favorite food is noodles The Mekong River is shorter than the Amazone River - Some students read their sentences - Check again - Students in 10 minutes My bicycle is older than yours Exercise 3: Choose the suitable words to fill in the blanks The Pikes are having breakfast now Mr Pike goes to work at o'clock He always has lunch at his office He comes home at o'clock Mrs Pike is washing the dishes Mary is helping her The Pikes always have dinner at home They often have vegetables and fish for dinner They are happy - Some students give their answers - Check again 4.Consolidation: - Review all structures Homework: - Learn by heart the structures - Do again these exercises Pre-date:…………………………………… Period of time Teaching date Total Out Class 6A:………… ………………… ………… …… Class 6B: ………………… ………… ……… Period 105: the second semester test Period 104: Review I The aims: In this lesson, students will be consolidated the structures and grammar they have learned and some exercises 1, Knowledges: a, Vocabulary: - Review the words b, Grammar: - Review: all structures and some exercises 2, Skills: Practice skills 3, Attitude: Work hard II Teaching methods: work in pairs, discuss in groups, ……… III Teaching aids: book, notebook, pictures, cassette, tape,…………………… IV Proceduce: Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? Sts' activities - The monitor answers Contents I Grammar: - Review all structures - Exercises Grammar: - Introduce the structures and give students some exercises - Ask students - Listen to the teacher - Students exercises 3, Exercises: Exercise 1: Read the passage Then answer the questions Mrs Chi and her children are in the garden She has a very beautiful garden behind her house There are a lot of - Students flowers in the garden She exercise in 10 usually puts some flowers in minutes sitting room Mrs Chi has many friends in London Her friends are going to visit her family next week Mrs Chi often gives them a few flowers when they go home from her house * Questions: What's Mrs Chi's garden like? II Exercises: Exercise 1: Read the passage Then answer the questions It is very beautiful Her friends are going to visit her family next week Yes, there are She often gives them a few flowers when they go home from her house Yes, she does When are her friends going to visit her family? Are there many flowers in the garden? What does Mrs Chi often give her friends when they go home from her house? Does she usually put any flowers in the sitting room? + Who can ask and answer? - Give answer keys Exercise 2: Supply the correct form of the verbs Nam often (go) to the movies on Sundays I (travel) to Vung Tau tomorrow Nga (watch) TV every evening They (play) soccer at the moment We (go) to the cinema tonight He usually (jog) in the morning She (play) aerobics every day He (read) in the living room every day What he (do) this weekend? 10 I (stay) there for days when I come there + Who can read your sentences? - Give answer keys 4, Remember: + Who can repeat the main contents of the lesson - Work in pairs - Check again - Students exercise in 10 minutes - Some students read their sentences Exercise 2: Supply the correct form of the verbs Nam often goes to the movies on Sundays I am going to travel to Vung Tau tomorrow Nga watches TV every evening They are playing soccer at the moment We are going to go to the cinema tonight He usually jogs in the morning She plays aerobics every day He reads in the living room every day What is he going to this weekend? 10 I am going to stay there for days when I come there - Check again IV Remember: - Review all structures - Students repeat V Homework: - Learn by heart the structures - Do again these exercises 5, Homework: - Write on the board - Write down * Coments: - Listen to the teacher the second semester test